Lexus OM60F86U
User Manual: Lexus 2011 Lexus LX 570 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 760 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
1Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors,
and steering column
2When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information
3Interior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience
4Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information
5When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or
is involved in an accident
6Vehicle
specifications Detailed vehicle information
7For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt and
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
1-1. Key information
Keys ...................................................... 28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors
Smart access system with
push-button start.......................... 33
Wireless remote control.............. 46
Side doors .......................................... 49
Back door........................................... 54
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats.......................................... 64
Rear seats........................................... 66
Driving position memory
system .............................................. 83
Head restraints................................. 87
Seat belts ............................................. 91
Steering wheel................................ 100
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror .............................................. 102
Outside rear view mirrors......... 104
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
and moon roof
Power windows.............................. 107
Moon roof ......................................... 110
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap........... 113
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system......... 116
Alarm................................................... 118
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ............... 121
SRS airbags ..................................... 123
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................. 137
Child restraint systems ............... 143
Installing child restraints............. 148
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle........................ 162
Engine (ignition) switch ............... 172
Automatic transmission.............. 176
Turn signal lever.............................. 181
Parking brake ................................. 182
Horn.................................................... 183
1Before driving
2When driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ..................... 184
Indicators and warning
lights................................................. 187
Multi-information display........... 190
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch............................ 193
Fog light switch .............................. 197
Windshield wipers and
washer............................................. 198
Rear window wiper and
washer............................................. 201
Headlight cleaner switch ......... 203
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control ............................... 204
Dynamic radar cruise
control........................................... 208
Intuitive parking assist ................ 222
Rear view monitor system ....... 230
Wide view front &
side monitor................................. 234
4-Wheel AHC (Active Height
Control Suspension)................ 244
AVS (Adaptive Variable
Suspension)................................. 255
Four-wheel drive system........... 256
Crawl Control ................................ 261
Driving assist systems................. 265
Pre-Collision System.................... 271
2-5. Driving information
Off-road precautions................. 276
Cargo and luggage...................... 281
Vehicle load limits....................... 288
Winter driving tips ....................... 289
Trailer towing................................. 294
Dinghy towing ................................ 313
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen .................................. 316
Setting the touch screen ........... 322
3-2. Using the air conditioning system
and defogger
Front air conditioning
system ............................................ 334
Rear air conditioning
system ............................................ 345
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers ............ 349
Windshield wiper de-icer........ 350
3Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type ........................ 351
Using the radio............................. 356
Using the CD/DVD
player.............................................. 366
Playing an audio CD................... 369
Playing MP3 and
WMA discs.................................. 373
Playing DVD video/audio
(with DVD player)..................... 377
Playing a video CD
(with DVD player)...................... 391
CD/DVD player and DVD
video disc information............. 394
Listening to Bluetooth®
audio.............................................. 404
Listening to a
USB memory/iPod.................... 412
Optimal use of the
audio/video system.................. 422
Using the AUX port.................... 424
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ............................ 425
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment
system
Rear seat entertainment
system features .......................... 429
Using the radio.............................. 437
Using the DVD player .............. 438
Playing an audio
CD/CD text................................ 439
Playing WMA/MP3 discs ....... 440
Playing DVD video/audio......... 441
Playing a video CD....................... 451
DVD player and DVD
video disc information............. 455
Using the video mode................ 457
Changing other settings............ 459
3-5. Using the hands-free system
(for cellular phone)
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone).................... 461
Using a Bluetooth® phone ...... 467
Setting the hands-free system
(for cellular phone).................... 481
3-6. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list............................. 510
• Interior lights .................................. 511
• Personal lights ............................. 512
•Luggage compartment
light................................................... 513
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-7. Using the storage features
List of storage features................ 514
• Glove box ..................................... 515
• Console box................................. 516
• Overhead console .................... 517
• Cup holders.................................. 518
• Bottle holders .............................. 519
• Auxiliary boxes.......................... 520
3-8. Other interior features
Cool box.......................................... 522
Sun visors......................................... 524
Vanity mirrors................................ 525
Ashtrays ........................................... 526
Cigarette lighters......................... 527
Power outlets................................ 528
Heated steering wheel.............. 530
Climate control seats/seat
heaters........................................... 532
Armrest ........................................... 535
Floor mats........................................ 536
Luggage compartment
features......................................... 538
Garage door opener................. 540
Safety Connect ............................. 546
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior................... 554
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.................... 557
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements.............................. 560
General maintenance................ 562
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ...................................... 565
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions.................................. 566
Hood ................................................. 570
Engine compartment................... 571
Tires .................................................. 588
Tire inflation pressure................. 597
Wheels .............................................. 601
Air conditioning filter................. 603
Electronic key battery................ 606
Checking and replacing
fuses............................................... 608
Light bulbs....................................... 625
4Maintenance and care
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
6
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers.................... 638
If your vehicle needs
to be towed.................................. 639
If you think something is
wrong ............................................. 645
Fuel pump shut off system ........ 646
Event data recorder.................... 647
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds............................................ 649
If a warning message is
displayed...................................... 660
If you have a flat tire..................... 663
If the engine will not start .......... 677
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P”........................... 679
If you lose your keys................... 680
If you cannot operate back
door opener ................................. 681
If the electronic key does
not operate properly .............. 682
If the battery is discharged ...... 685
If your vehicle overheats .......... 688
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................................. 691
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency........................ 692
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)..................... 694
Fuel information............................ 704
Tire information............................. 707
6-2. Customization
Customizable features................ 718
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........................... 728
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners........................... 730
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)..................................... 731
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 733
5When trouble arises 6Vehicle specifications
7For owners
8
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Headlights (low beam)
P. 193
Headlights (high beam) and daytime
running lights
P. 193, 195
Pictorial index Exterior
Fog lights
P. 197
Front turn signal lights
P. 181
Hood
P. 570
Windshield wipers
P. 198
Moon roof
P. 110
Outside rear view
mirrors
P. 104
Parking lights
P. 193
Front side marker light
P. 193
9
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tires
●Rotation
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure
●Information
P. 588
P. 663
P. 597
P. 707
Back door
P. 54
Side doors
P. 49
Fuel filler door
P. 113
Rear turn signal lights
P. 181
Rear window wiper
P. 201
Rear window defogger
P. 349
License plate lights
P. 193
Tail lights
P. 193
Roof luggage carrier
P. 281
: If equipped
Rear side marker light
P. 193
10
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Power window
switches
P. 107
Pictorial index Interior
Seat belts
P. 91
SRS front passenger
airbag
P. 123
SRS driver airbag
P. 123
Head restraints
P. 87
Console box
Cool box
P. 516
P. 522
Armrest
P. 535
A
Front seats
P. 64
SRS side airbags
P. 123
Rear air conditioning
controls
P. 345
Rear seats
P. 66
Ashtray
P. 526
Floor mat
P. 536
11
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
P. 102
Moon roof switch
P. 110
Interior light
P. 511
Vanity mirrors
P. 525
Sun visors
P. 524
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 123
A
Overhead console
P. 517
Interior light
Personal lights
P. 511
P. 512
Personal lights
P. 512
Interior light
P. 511
Rear seat entertainment system
P. 429
“SOS” button
P. 546
Garage door opener switches
P. 540
: If equipped
13
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
C
Climate control seats/seat heaters
P. 532
Shift lever
P. 176
Shift lock override button
P. 679
Crawl Control switch
P. 261
Height select/height
control switches
P. 244
ECT switch
P. 177
Damping mode select
switch
P. 255
Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
P. 526
P. 527
Parking brake lever
P. 182
AUX port
USB port
Power outlet
P. 424
P. 412
P. 528
Cup holders
P. 518
Four-wheel drive control switch
P. 256
: If equipped
14
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 193
P. 181
P. 197
Windshield wipers and washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch
P. 198
P. 201
Hood opener
P. 570
Gauges and meters
Multi-information display
P. 184
P. 190
Glove box
P. 515
SRS knee airbags
P. 123
Fuel filler door opener
P. 113
Bottle holder
P. 519
Tire pressure warning reset switch
P. 590
15
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
A
Air conditioning
system
P. 334
Front passenger’s
seat belt reminder
light
P. 652
Clock *
Audio system
P. 351
Emergency flasher switch
P. 638
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers
P. 349
Touch screen
P. 316
Navigation system *
Front passenger AIR BAG
ON and OFF indicator
P. 137
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
18
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
C
Engine (ignition) switch
P. 172
VSC OFF switch
P. 267
Center differential
lock/unlock switch
P. 256
Power back door off switch
P. 55
Intuitive parking assist switch
P. 222
Roll sensing of curtain shield
airbags off switch
P. 136
VIEW switch
P. 234
Pictorial index Instrument panel
19
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
D
Headlight cleaner switch
P. 203
Outside rear view mirror control switches
P. 104
Odometer/trip meter and trip
meter reset button
P. 185
Instrument panel light control
P. 185
Tilt and telescopic steering
control switch
P. 100
AFS OFF switch
P. 194
Auxiliary box
P. 520
Power back door switch
P. 55
Easy access mode switch
P. 247
: If equipped
Heated steering wheel switch
P. 530
22
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, includ-
ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. How-
ever, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation
leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under war-
ranty.
23
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle may affect elec-
tronic systems such as the multi-port fuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel
injection system, cruise control system, dynamic radar cruise control system, anti-
lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to
check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions
regarding installation.
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components
may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
24
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■General precautions regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette
lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
25
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the
risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its
equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not
do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
26
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Before driving 1
27
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
1-1. Key information
Keys.............................................. 28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors
Smart access system with
push-button start................... 33
Wireless remote control......... 46
Side doors.................................... 49
Back door .................................... 54
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors, steering
wheel)
Front seats................................... 64
Rear seats.................................... 66
Driving position memory
system....................................... 83
Head restraints.......................... 87
Seat belts ...................................... 91
Steering wheel......................... 100
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror....................................... 102
Outside rear view
mirrors..................................... 104
1-4. Opening and closing
the windows and moon roof
Power windows........................ 107
Moon roof.................................. 110
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap .... 113
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system........................................ 116
Alarm........................................... 118
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ........ 121
SRS airbags .............................. 123
Front passenger occupant
classification system............ 137
Child restraint systems ......... 143
Installing child restraints....... 148
28
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access
system with push-button start
(P. 33 )
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 46)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
■Card key (if equipped)
Electronic key
Operating the smart access sys-
tem with push-button start
(P. 33)
Mechanical keys
29
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the mechanical key
Take out the mechanical key.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a look
cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt
to insert it.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the smart
access system with push-button
start does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P. 682 )
30
1-1. Key information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Card key
●The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only in an
emergency, such as when the key does not operate properly.
●If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button
using a pen tip etc. If it is difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
●The card key is not waterproof.
■When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 515)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
●To store the mechanical key in the card key,
insert it inside while pressing the lock
release button.
●If the battery cover is not installed and the
battery falls out or if the battery was
removed because the key got wet, reinstall
the battery with the positive terminal facing
the Lexus emblem.
31
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a key is lost, a new mechanical key can be made by your Lexus dealer, using the key
number plate. (P. 680)
■When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed
accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves
that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
●Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in a ultrasonic washer etc.
●Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
such materials.
●Do not disassemble the keys.
●Do not place the key near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio systems, glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-fre-
quency therapy equipment.
32
1-1. Key information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■Precautions for handling the card keys
●Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key to the card key.
Doing so may damage the card key.
●If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card
key may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key,
immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals.
(To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp it and pull.) If the battery is corroded,
have your Lexus dealer replace the battery.
●Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
●If the battery cover is frequently removed, the cover may become loose.
●When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rap-
idly.
●The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the
following situations:
• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins or keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp objects, such as a tip of mechanical pen-
cil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinners or benzene.
33
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the elec-
tronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 3 4)
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 3 4 )
Starts and stops the engine (P. 172)
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Unlocking and locking the doors
Side door handle
Grip the handle to unlock the
doors.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The door cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the door is locked.
Press the lock button to lock the
doors.
Pressing and holding the button
closes the windows and moon roof.
(This setting must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.)
Back door
Press the unlock button to unlock
the doors.
The door cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the door is locked.
Lock the back door again when
you leave the vehicle. The back
door will not lock automatically
after it has been opened and then
closed.
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Press the lock button to lock the
doors.
Antenna location and effective range
■Antenna location
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Antenna outside luggage com-
partment
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
an outside door handle. (Only
the doors detecting the key
can be operated.)
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
■Operation signals
●Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the
doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
●Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and
moon roof are closing.
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the fol-
lowing situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wire-
less remote control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly.
(Ways of coping: P. 6 82)
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire-
less communication devices
●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal-
lic object
• Card to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
•Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
●When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
●When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices
that emit radio waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Switching the door unlock function
If it is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless
remote control.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, press and hold
for approximately 5 seconds while pressing on the key.
The setting changes each time an operation is preformed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,
and repeat .)
Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of the
doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be
locked again and the alarm will automatically be set. In case that the alarm is trig-
gered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 1 1 8 )
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
Multi-information
display Unlocking function Beep
Hold the driver’s door handle
to unlock only the driver’s
door.
Exterior: Beeps three
times
Interior: Rings once
Hold either door handle to
unlock all doors.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Rings once
STEP 3
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the
vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
●When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more
●When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
●The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function
(P. 46) or the mechanical key. (P. 6 82 )
■Electronic key battery depletion
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
(The card key battery life is about a year and a half.)
●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine
stops. (P. 41)
●The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used because
the key always transmits radio waves. If the smart access system with push-but-
ton start or the wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detec-
tion area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery
when necessary. (P. 606)
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
•Glass top ranges
• Table lamps
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
■Note for the entry function
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the
system may not operate properly in the following cases.
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the
rear bumper center when the back door is locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover, floor or in the
glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes are changed.
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone.
●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the
engine if the electronic key is near the window.
●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key
is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle operation may pre-
vent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door han-
dle.
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle.
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the
multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable
accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Perform the appropriate correction
procedure described in the following table.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
2 seconds
An attempt was made to lock
the doors using the entry
function while the electronic
key was still inside the pas-
senger compartment
Retrieve the electronic
key from the passenger
compartment and lock
the doors again
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
60 seconds
An attempt was made to exit
the vehicle and lock the
doors without first turning the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF
Tu r n t h e “ E N G I N E
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the doors
again
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
10 seconds
An attempt was made to lock
the vehicle while a door is
open
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors again
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm pings
continuously*1
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned to
ACCESSORY mode while
the driver’s door was open
(or the driver’s door was
opened while the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch was in
ACCESSORY mode)
Tu r n t h e “ E N G I N E
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver’s door
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned
OFF while the driver’s door
was open
Close the driver’s door
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously*1
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNI-
TION ON or ACCESSORY
mode, an attempt was made
to open the door and exit the
vehicle, and the shift lever
was not in “P”
Shift the shift lever to “P”
and turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF
Interior and exte-
rior alarms sound
continuously*1
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNI-
TION ON or ACCESSORY
mode, the driver’s door was
closed after the key was car-
ried outside the vehicle, and
the shift lever not in “P”
Shift the shift lever to
“P”, turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver’s door again
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
*1: A message will be shown on the multi-information display in the instrument
cluster.
*2: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the
electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving
signal from the key. (P. 37)
■If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 682 )
●Starting the engine: P. 683
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 60 6
■Customization
Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 7 18)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm pings
once*1
The electronic key has a low
battery
Replace the electronic
key battery
An attempt was made to start
the engine without the elec-
tronic key being present, or
the electronic key was not
functioning normally
Start the engine with the
electronic key
present*2
Interior alarm pings
once and exterior
alarm sounds 3
times*1
The driver’s door was closed
after the key was carried out-
side the vehicle, and the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch was not turned OFF
Tu r n t h e “ E N G I N E
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver’s door again
An occupant carried the
electronic key outside the
vehicle and closed the door
while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was not OFF
Bring the electronic key
back into the vehicle
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID:NI4TMLF-5
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away
from the smart access system with push-button start antennas. (P. 3 6)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, smart
access system with push-button start can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for
details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio
waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable smart access system
with push-button start.
●Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling smart access system with push-but-
ton start.
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle
from outside the vehicle.
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the but-
ton again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)*
Opens/closes the back door
(press and hold)
Sounds alarm (press and
hold) (P. 12 0)
*: This setting must be customized
at your Lexus dealer.
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Operation signals
●Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the
doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
●Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and
moon roof are opening.
■Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 10 seconds if an
attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
■Power back door operation
The power back door can be opened while the vehicle is locked. (one motion)
■Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the door will set the alarm system.
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 39
■Security feature
P. 41
■If the wireless remote control does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 682 )
●Starting the engine: P. 683
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 60 6
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 37
■Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 7 18)
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID:HYQ14AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14AEM
FCC ID: HYQ14ABB
FCC ID: HYQ13BZS
FCC ID: HYQ14ABK*
FCC ID: HYQ14ABS*
FCC ID: HYQ13CZA*
*: For U.S. mainland only
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
49
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switch.
■Entry function
P. 3 4
■Wireless remote control
P. 46
■Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
■Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handles
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
50
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Locking the driver’s door from the outside without a key
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be
detected correctly and the door may be locked.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the locks
are set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
STEP 1
STEP 2
51
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
■Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform step 2 within 20 sec-
onds.)
Shift the shift lever to “P” or “N”,
and press and hold the driver’s
door lock switch ( or )
for approximately 5 seconds then
release.
The shift lever and switch positions
corresponding to the desired func-
tion to be set are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel
the function.
Function Operation
Shift position linked door
locking function Shifting the shift lever out of “P” locks all doors.
Shift position linked door
unlocking function Shifting the shift lever to “P” unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door locking
function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver’s door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver’s door is
opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 1
STEP 2
52
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked
and then unlocked.
Function Shift lever position Driver’s door lock
switch position
Shift position linked door locking
function “P”
Shift position linked door unlocking
function
Speed linked door locking function
“N”
Driver’s door linked door unlocking
function
■Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
■Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 682 )
■Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 71 8)
53
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in
death or serious injury.
●Always use a seat belt.
●Always lock all doors.
●Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it
may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
●Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.
54
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Back door
The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following proce-
dures.
■Locking and unlocking the back door
Door lock switch
P. 49
Entry function
P. 33
Wireless remote control
P. 46
■Opening the back door from outside the vehicle
Unlocks the back door
Raise the back door
Pull the handle
STEP 1
STEP 2
55
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Power back door switch
Pressing the switch closes upper
back door automatically. (A
buzzer sounds)
Pressing the switch while the upper
back door is closing opens it again.
Canceling the power back door system
Turn the main switch to disable the
power back door system.
Inoperative
Operative
The back door cannot be operated
even with the wireless remote con-
trol or power back door switch.
■Opening the back door from inside the vehicle
The power back door can be
opened/closed using the power
back door switch or wireless
remote control. (P. 46)
Push and hold the switch to
close or open. (A buzzer
sounds.)
56
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Rear step bumper
The rear step bumper is for rear
end protection and easier step-up
loading.
■The power back door can be opened/closed when
The back door can be opened automatically when the power back door main
switch is on, and the following conditions are met.
●The power back door is unlocked (except closing operation)
●The lower back door is closed (closing operation only)
●To open the power back door when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode, the power back door is unlocked, the vehicle speed
must be lower than 1 mph (3 km/h) and the shift lever must be in “P”.
■When closing the back door
●Make sure that the lower side of the back door is closed before closing the
upper side of the back door.
■If the back door opener is inoperative
P. 68 1
●Lower the back door using the back door
handle, and make sure to push the back
door down from the outside to close it.
●The buzzer sounds once when the power
back door closer begins to close the lower
side of the back door.
57
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Jam protection function
●If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, the back
door will automatically operate in the opposite direction.
●If the lower back door is opened while the upper back door is in a closing oper-
ation, it automatically opens again.
■When re-connecting the battery
To enable the power back door to operate properly, perform the following:
●Unlock the back door using the door lock switch
●Close the back door manually
■Back door closer
In the event that upper side and lower side of the back door are left slightly open,
the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
■Fall-down protection function
While the power back door is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it
will stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door from rapidly falling
down.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. switch operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 7 18)
58
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■While driving
●Keep the back door closed while driving.
If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage
may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious
health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
●Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back
door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an acci-
dent.
●Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not leave children alone in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat
exhaustion.
●Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s
hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.
59
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.
●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before open-
ing it. Failure to do so may cause the back door fall closed again after it is opened.
●When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-
rounding area is safe.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back
door is about to open or close.
●Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may
move abruptly in strong wind.
●The back door may fall if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open or close the
back door on an incline than on a level sur-
face, so beware of the back door unexpect-
edly opening or closing by itself. Make sure
that the back door is fully open and secure
before using the luggage compartment.
●When closing the back door, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from being
caught.
●When closing the back door, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
back door handle is used to fully close the
back door, it may result in hands or arms
being caught.
60
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
●Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do not
hang on the back door damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to break,
causing an accident.
●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the back door.
Such additional weight on the back door may cause the back door to fall closed
again after it is opened.
■Back door closer
●Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the power
back door system is cancelled.
●In the event that the back door is left slightly
open, the back door closer will automati-
cally close it to the fully closed position. It
takes several seconds before the back
door closer begins to operate. Be careful
not to catch fingers or anything else in the
back door, as this may cause bone frac-
tures or other serious injuries.
61
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Power back door
Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or
anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back
door is about to open or close.
●If the power back door main switch is turned off while the back door is operating
during automatic operation, the back door stops operating. Take extra care when
on an incline, as the back door may open or close suddenly.
●If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer
may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then
has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the back door
may move abruptly.
●On an incline, the back door may fall after it opens automatically. Make sure the
back door is fully open and secure.
●In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and
automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be oper-
ated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped back door may sud-
denly fall, causing an accident.
• When the back door contacts an obstacle
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned to the IGNITION ON mode or the engine is
started during automatic operation
62
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the back door.
The power back door may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the back
door may fall closed again it is opened.
●In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back door
main switch. Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unintentionally
if the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fin-
gers being caught and injured.
■Jam protection function
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
●The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object
that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
63
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in mal-
function.
■To prevent back door closer malfunction
Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is operat-
ing.
■To prevent damage to the power back door
●Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would pre-
vent movement of the back door. Operating the power back door when exces-
sive load is present on the back door may cause a malfunction.
●Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is oper-
ating.
●Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the
power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected,
the power back door will not operate in automatic operation.
●Do not attach any foreign objects, such as
stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the
damper stay rod.
●Do not touch the damper stay rod with
gloves or other fabric items.
●Do not attach any accessories other than
genuine Lexus parts to the back door.
●Do not place your hand on the damper stay
or apply lateral forces to it.
Damper stay
64
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Active head restraint
When the occupant’s lower back
presses against the seatback dur-
ing a rear-end collision, the head
restraint moves slightly forward
and upward to help reduce the risk
of whiplash on the seat occupant.
Seat position fore/aft control
switch
Seatback angle control
switch
Seat cushion (front) angle
control switch
Vertical height control switch
Lumber support control
switch
Seat cushion length adjust-
ment switch (driver’s side
only)
65
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Active head restraint
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to move.
Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may make the inner structure of the
head restraint appear. This does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment
●Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
●Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to
reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, during an accident the lap belt may slide past the hips
and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly
move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
During
rear-end
collision
Inner
structure
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Rear seats
Second seat
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Seat position adjustment
switch
Third seat
67
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tumbling the second seats and third seat entry
For easy access to the third seat, perform in “Tumbling the sec-
ond seats” (P. 68).
■Before tumbling the second seats
Stow the seat belt buckles and
lower the head restraints to the
lowest position.
Pass the outer seat belts through
the seat belt hangers and secure
the seat belt plates.
This prevents the shoulder belt
from being damaged.
Make sure that the seat belts are
removed from the hangers before
using them.
STEP 1
STEP 1
STEP 2
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Tumbling the second seats
Fold down the seatback while pull-
ing the seatback angle adjustment
lever, and swing the whole seat up
and forward.
Hook the holding strap to the
assist grip and secure the seat by
pulling its free end.
When returning the second seat to
its original position, stow the hold-
ing strap.
STEP 1
STEP 2
69
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Remove the seat hook covers from
the back of the seat cushion, and
install them on the seat hooks.
When returning the second seat to
its original position, remove the
seat hook covers from the floor and
install them in the back of the seat
cushion.
STEP 3
■If you cannot raise the left side seatback
Lift the seatback until it stops.
Lower the seatback a little then lift it again.
STEP 1
STEP 2
70
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Folding the third seats (Automatic type)
■Before folding the third seats
Stow the seat belts buckles.
Stow the center head restraint in the seatback. (P. 9 0)
Pass the outer seat belts through
the seat belt hangers and secure
the seat belt plates.
This prevents the shoulder belt
from being damaged.
Make sure that the seat belts are
removed from the hangers before
using them.
Stow the center seat belt tabs in the cover set in the roof.
(P. 93)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
71
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Folding down the third seatback
For right side
For left side
The seat will automatically fold
when the switch is pressed.
72
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Folding up the third seats
Perform following steps in “Before folding the third seats”.
(P. 70)
If the switch is pressed and held,
the seat will automatically fold and
lift sideward. (The buzzer sounds
twice when the seat is about to lift.)
If the switch is released while the
seat is lifting sideward, operation
will stop and a buzzer will sound
continuously.
Before operating, make sure that
the handle on the rear of the seat-
back is secure.
Remove the seat hook covers from
the underside of the seat cushion,
and install them on the seat hooks.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
73
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Returning the third seats
Remove the seat hook covers from
the floor and install them into the
underside of the seat cushion.
If the switch is held down the seat
will automatically return to the
folding position. (Buzzer sounds
twice)
If the switch is released while
returning to the folding position,
operation will stop and a buzzer
will sound continuously.
Pull the handle and raise the seat-
backs.
Fix the handle securely in its origi-
nal position after use.
Raise the head restraints.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
74
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Alarms and indicators
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only
alarms are sound.
Indicator light and
buzzer Situation Correction procedure
Buzzer sounds for
10 seconds Indicator
light on*
Shift lever is not in the
“P” position with the
engine start stop switch
is in the ignition on
mode.
Stop the switch opera-
tion during the auto-
matic third seat is in
motion.
Move the shift lever in
the “P” position with the
engine start stop switch
in ignition on mode.
Return the third seat
from a halfway position
to tumbling position or
the original position with
the third seat return
switch or third seat tum-
bling switch.
Indicator light flashes*
The seat movement is
stopped in a half way
when the back door is
opened.
75
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Indicator light and
buzzer Situation Correction procedure
Buzzer sounds for
10 seconds Indicator
light flashes*
Automatic tumbling or
return operation is
stopped because of a
system problem.
Have the system
checked by your Lexus
dealer.
The seat is not moved to
the table mode from the
original position after 10
seconds the tumbling
switch is pressed.
Check something is
caught between the seat
cushion and seatback. If
nothing is caught, have
the system checked by
your Lexus dealer.
Buzzer sounds for
10 seconds Indicator
light blinks slowly*
Automatic closing oper-
ation is stopped
because of a system
problem.
Have the system
checked by your Lexus
dealer.
76
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
*: A warning will be shown on the multi-information display in the instrument clus-
ter.
Indicator light and
buzzer Situation Correction procedure
Indicator light flashes
Any of the tumbling or
return switch is pushed
when shift lever is not in
the “P” position with the
engine start stop switch
is in the ignition on
mode.
Move the shift lever in
the “P” position with the
engine start stop switch
in ignition on mode.
Indicator light flashes
3 times
Table mode switch is
pushed when shift lever
is not in the “P” position
with the engine start
stop switch is in the igni-
tion on mode.
77
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Folding the third seats (Manual type)
■Before folding the third seats
Stow the seat belts buckles.
Stow the center head restraint in the seatback.(P. 9 0)
Pass the outer seat belts through
the seat belt hangers and secure
the seat belt plates.
This prevents the shoulder belt
from being damaged.
Make sure that the seat belts are
removed from the hangers before
using them.
Stow the center seat belt tabs in the cover set in the roof.
(P. 93)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
78
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Folding down the third seatback
The seat will automatically fold
when the switch is pressed.
79
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Folding up the third seats
Perform following steps in “Before folding the third seats”.
(P. 77)
If the switch is pressed, the seat will
automatically fold and lift
sideward.
When the third seat tumble switch
is pressed with the seat is in fold
position, the seat lifts sideward.
Before operating, make sure that
the handle on the rear of the seat-
back is secure.
Push and lock the seat securely.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
80
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Remove the seat hook covers from
the underside of the seat cushion,
and install them on the seat hooks.
■Returning the third seats
Remove the seat hook covers from
the floor and install them into the
underside of the seat cushion.
Pull the seat lock release lever and
lower the seat, then lock the seat
leg lock to the floor.
The seatback striker will be auto-
matically stowed when the seat is
lowered.
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
81
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Pull the handle and raise the seat-
backs.
Fix the handle securely in its origi-
nal position after use.
Raise the head restraints.
STEP 3
STEP 4
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce
the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, during an accident the lap belt may slide past the hips and
apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoul-
der belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.
■When the seatback is folded
●Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback while driving.
●Be sure to install the seat hook covers on the seat hooks, or you may get burned
when they become hot.
82
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■When returning the seatbacks to their original position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury.
●Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.
●Make sure the seats are securely locked. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt
from operating properly.
●Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat.
●Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.
■Avoiding damage to seat components
Do not hang or attach anything on the seatback striker.
NOTICE
■Before tumbling, folding up the seats
The seat belts and buckles must be stowed.
■After returning the third seat
Make sure that the handle on the rear of the seatback has been secured.
83
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Driving position memory system
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be entered into the computer’s
memory and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this
function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
■Entering a position to memory
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
While pressing the “SET” but-
ton, or within 3 seconds after
the “SET” button is pressed,
press and hold button “1”, “2” or
“3” until the signal beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previ-
ously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Press button “1”, “2” or “3” to
recall the desired position.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
84
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
’
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing
the following:
Using the wireless remote control
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF after closing the
driver’s door.
While pressing the desired button
(“1”, “2” or “3”), press on
the wireless remote control until
the signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver’s door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.
Open one of the doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be
locked again and the alarm will automatically be set. In case that the alarm is trig-
gered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 118)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
85
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the door lock switch
Carry only the key (including the card key) to which you want to link
the driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving
position cannot be linked properly.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF after closing the
driver’s door.
While pressing the desired button
(“1”, “2” or “3”), press the lock or
unlock side on the door lock
switch (either the driver or passen-
ger side) until the signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver’s door is unlocked
using the enter function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.
STEP 1
STEP 2
■Canceling the linked door unlock operation
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF after closing the driver’s
door.
Using the wireless remote control: While pressing “SET” button, press
button on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps.
Using the door lock switch: While pressing “SET” button, press the lock or
unlock side on the door lock switch until the signal beeps.
STEP 1
STEP 2
86
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Retained accessory power
●Each memorized position (except for the steering wheel position) can be acti-
vated within 3 minutes after the driver’s door is opened, even if the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned off.
●Each memorized position (except for the steering wheel position) can be acti-
vated within 60 seconds after the driver’s door is closed, even if the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned off.
■To cancel seat position recall
Perform any one of the following operations.
●Press the “SET” button
●Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
●Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall)
●Adjust the steering wheel using the tilt and telescopic steering control switch
(only cancels steering wheel position recall)
■If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions must be reset because the computer’s memory is erased
when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
87
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Vertical adjustment
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pressing the lock release
button.
Angle adjustment
Second seats
Vertical adjustment
Up
Down
Push the head restraint up or
down while pressing the lock
release button.
Lock release button
Lock release button
88
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■Adjusting the second center seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
■Removing the head restraints
Front seats
Third outboard seats
To fold
Pull the head restraint angle
lever to fold the head restraint.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the
lock release button.
Lock release button
89
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Second seats
Third center seat
Third outside seats
The head restraint cannot be removed.
■Installing the head restraints (except third outboard seats)
Align the head restraint with the installation holes.
Push down the head restraint to the lock position.
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the
lock release button.
Lock release button
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the
lock release button.
Lock
release
button
STEP 1
STEP 2
90
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When not using the third center seat head restraint
CAUTION
■Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are
locked in position.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Open the zipper on the back of the third seat
and stow the head restraint inside.
91
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
■Correct use of the seat belts
●Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
●Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
●Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.
■Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until
a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
92
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Third center seat belt
The third center seat belt is a 3-point type restraint with 2 buckles. Both
seat belt buckles must be correctly located and securely latched for
proper operation.
Make sure that the buckle with the
gray buckle release button is
securely latched for ready use of
the center seat belt.
■Adjusting the height of the belt (front and second outboard seats)
Down
Up
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
93
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Release method
The belt can be completely released when not required, such as when
removing the third seat.
To release the hooked tab, insert
the mechanical key into the hole
on the buckle with the light gray
buckle release button.
Stow the seat belt tabs as shown.
■Extracting the belt
Pull the belt out partially, then remove the tabs from the cover.
STEP 1
STEP 2
94
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Seat belt pretensioners (front and second outboard seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal colli-
sion.
The pretensioner may not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
s
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the pre-
collision system will retract the seat belt, thus enhancing the effectiveness
of the seat belt pretensioner in a crash.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses con-
trol of the vehicle. (P. 271)
■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
95
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a second seat passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended.
This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt
again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 14 8 )
■Pregnant women
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 9 1 )
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoul-
der and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suf-
fer death or serious injury as a result of sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or a collision.
96
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When the third center seat belt cannot be extended
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 1 43)
●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 91 regarding seat belt usage.
■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■Seat belt extender
Put your fingers between the seat belt and the
holder.
Pull the seat belt forcefully in the direction of
the arrow and then release it to unlock.
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a person-
alized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
97
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
●Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat
belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating
position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoul-
der. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
(P. 92)
■Seat belt pretensioners
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
●If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case,
the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
98
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Child restraint lock function belt
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt
becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out
leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■When using the third center seat belt
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belt cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate han-
dling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in
death or serious injury.
Do not use the third center seat belt with
either buckle released. Fastening only one of
the buckles may result in death or serious
injury in case of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or a collision.
99
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt extender, if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system, because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
■Precaution for pre-collision seat belts
Do not rely on the pre-collision system to avoid accidents. Always pay attention to
the surrounding conditions, and drive safely and responsibly.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
100
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Steering wheel
Auto tilt away
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned OFF, the
steering wheel returns to its
stowed position by moving up and
away to enable easier driver entry
and exit.
Switching to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return
the steering wheel to the original
position.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Up
Down
Toward the driver
Away from the driver
101
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Automatic adjustment of the steering position
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 8 3 )
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
102
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Adjusting the height of the rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles
behind and automatically reduce the reflected light.
Turns auto mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
auto mode is turned on.
The mirror will revert to the auto
mode each time the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode.
103
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■To prevent sensor error
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.
104
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Outside rear view mirrors
Folding back the mirrors
Folds the mirrors
Extends the mirrors
Putting the outside rear view mir-
ror folding switch in the neutral
position sets the mirrors to auto-
matic mode. Automatic mode
allows the folding or extending of
the mirrors to be linked to locking/
unlocking of the doors.
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Select a mirror to adjust
Left
Right
Adjust the mirror
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP 1
STEP 2
105
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the outside rear view mirror defogger to defog the mirrors. (P. 3 49)
■Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to auto mode, the outside rear
view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (P. 102)
■Linked mirror function when reversing
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle
is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will
not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between “L” and
“R”).
■Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 8 3 )
106
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand
caught by the moving mirror.
■When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
NOTICE
■If ice should jam the mirror
Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the
mirror.
107
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock pas-
senger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or clos-
ing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*: Pressing the switch in the oppo-
site direction will stop window
travel partway.
■The power windows can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Door lock linked window operation
The following functions can be used if customized at your Lexus dealer.
●The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
(P. 682 )
●The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 46 )
●The power windows can be closed using the entry function. (P. 3 4)
108
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF.
They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the rel-
evant door.
●After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power win-
dow switch in the one-touch closing position while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
●If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has
closed.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
opened completely.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once
again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the win-
dow has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
109
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 7 18)
CAUTION
■Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■Jam protection function
●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
110
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and
down.
■Opening and closing
Open
Stops just before it is opened
fully. Press the switch again to
fully open.
Close
To stop partway, press the switch
lightly.
■Tilt up and down
Tilt up
Tilt down
To stop partway, press the switch
lightly.
111
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■The moon roof can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Door lock linked moon roof operation
The following functions can be used if customized at your Lexus dealer.
●The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 682 )
●The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 46 )
●The moon roof can be closed using the entry function. (P. 3 4)
■Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. It
cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting
down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically
Keep the switch depressed.
■To reduce moon roof wind noise
Drive with the moon roof at first opened position (just before fully opened position).
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will
open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
112
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and message is shown on the multi-information display in the
instrument panel when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF and the
driver’s door is opened with the moon roof open.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 71 8)
CAUTION
■Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a
position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■Jam protection function
●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
113
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■Before refueling the vehicle
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that all
the doors and windows are closed.
■Opening the fuel tank cap
Pull the lever.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
114
1-5. Refueling
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank cap,
turn it until a clicking sound is
heard.
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
■Fuel types
Use premium unleaded gasoline. (Octane Rating 91 [Research Octane Number
96] or higher)
■Fuel tank capacity
Approximately 24.5 gal. (93 L, 20.4 Imp.gal.)
115
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so, may result in death or serious injury.
●Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to
ignite.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.
In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to
come close to an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Failure to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted
surface.
116
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
●If the key is in contact with a metallic object
●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key
with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s
on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned OFF to
indicate that the system is oper-
ating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
117
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Engine immobilizer certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
118
1-6. Theft deterrent system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is
detected.
■Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
●A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than by
using the entry function or the wireless remote control. (The
doors will lock again automatically.)
●The hood is opened.
●The battery is reconnected.
■Setting the alarm system
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all doors.
The system will be set automati-
cally after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.
■Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.
●Unlock the doors using the entry function or the wireless remote
control.
●Start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
119
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the
following.
●Nobody is in the vehicle.
●The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
●No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■Tr i g g er in g o f t he al arm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations. (Stopping the alarm deacti-
vates the alarm system.)
●The door is unlocked using the mechanical
key.
●A person inside the vehicle opens a door
or hood.
●The battery is reconnected.
120
1-6. Theft deterrent system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When the battery is disconnected
Be sure to cancel the alarm system.
If the battery is disconnected before canceling the alarm, the system may be trig-
gered when the battery is reconnected.
■Alarm-operated door lock
●When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent
intruders.
●Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make
sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the battery.
■Panic mode
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
When is pressed for longer than about
one second, the head lights/tail lights/emer-
gency flashers will flash, the front and rear
interior lights will come on, and an alarm will
sound for about 60 seconds to deter any
person from trying to break into or damage
your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
wireless remote control.
121
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive with a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 64 )
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 64)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily opera-
ble.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 100)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 87)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 9 1)
122
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■While driving
●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment
mechanism may also be damaged.
●Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion, to
reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the hips
and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.
■Adjusting the seat position
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
123
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
Front airbags
Driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passen-
ger from impact with interior components.
Knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.
124
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Side and curtain shield airbags
Side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
Side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the second outboard seat occupants.
Curtain shield airbags
●Can help protect primarily the head of front seat occupants.
●Can help protect primarily the head of second outboard seat
occupants.
●Can help protect primarily the head of third seat occupants.
125
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Airbag system components
Occupant detection system
(ECU & sensors)
Knee airbags
Curtain shield airbags
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger occupant
classification indicator light
Side and curtain shield air-
bag sensors
Side airbags (front seats)
SRS warning light and
“RSCA OFF” indicator light
Curtain shield airbag sensors
Side airbags
(second outboard seats)
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat position sensor
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
Floor sensor
Roll sensing of curtain shield
airbags off switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Front airbag sensors
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
126
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system
controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger.
The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc.
The front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occu-
pant classification sensor etc.
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS air-
bag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sen-
sor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system
triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occu-
pants.
■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the front seats, second seats, and parts of the front, center and rear pil-
lars, and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also
be hot.
●The windshield may crack.
●For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a
severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to
the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to
push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants
to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emer-
gency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 546 )
127
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
●The SRS front airbag will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set
threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
●It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehi-
cle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
●The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is not a passenger sit-
ting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may
deploy if luggage is put in the seat or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is
unoccupied.
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield air-
bags)
●The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of
an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding
to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle
colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle ori-
entation at an approximately speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
●The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passen-
ger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passen-
ger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat or the seat belt is fastened, even
if the seat is unoccupied.
128
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-
sion
The SRS front, side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the
illustration.
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal colli-
sion. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of
the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or vehicle falling
●The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
●The vehicle skids and hits curb stone.
●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
129
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag
(side airbags and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of
the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in
a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side colli-
sion.
The SRS curtain shield airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a
low-speed side collision.
●Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
●Collision from the side at an angle
●Collision from the front
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
●Collision from the front
●Collision from the rear
●Pitching end over end
130
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer, as soon as possible.
●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
●A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag
or lower portion of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
●The surface of the seats with the side air-
bag is scratched, cracked or otherwise
damaged.
●The portion of the front, center and rear pil-
lar garnish, or roof interior containing the
curtain shield airbags inside is scratched,
cracked or otherwise damaged.
131
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of infla-
tion, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm)
distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to
see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still main-
taining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
132
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
(P. 143)
●If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the driver’s seat belt buckle but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the driver’s
seat belt, the SRS driver’s airbag system will
judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt
even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the driver’s airbag
may not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat
belt with the seat belt extender.
133
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or
passenger have items resting on their
knees.
●Do not lean against the door, the roof side
rail or the front, center and rear pillars.
●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seats toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
134
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to
remove it.
●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components shown on P. 125.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any
residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steer-
ing wheel pad or lower portion of the
instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when
SRS driver, front passenger and knee air-
bags deploy.
●Do not attach anything to areas such as the
door, windshield glass, side door glass,
front, center and rear pillars, roof side rail
or assist grip.
●Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and seri-
ously injure or kill you, should the SRS cur-
tain shield airbag deploy.
135
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by
your Lexus dealer.
■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications with-
out consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or
serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.
●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, center and rear pillars or roof
side rail.
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment.
●Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar
etc.).
●Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system.
●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players.
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
136
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Deactivating the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover
On/off (Hold for a few seconds)
The “RSCA OFF” (roll sensing of
curtain shield airbags off) indicator
light turns on.
(Only when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.)
■This switch only should be used
In a situation where the inflation is not desired (such as during extreme off road driv-
ing).
■Operating conditions when the “RSCA OFF” indicator is on
●The curtain shield airbag and seat belt pretensioner will not activate in a vehicle
rollover.
●The curtain shield airbag will activate in a severe side impact.
CAUTION
■While normal driving
Make sure the “RSCA OFF” indicator light is not turned on. If it is left on, the curtain
shield airbag will not activate in the event of an accident, which may cause death or
serious injury.
137
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification sys-
tem. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and
activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.
SRS warning light
AIR BAG OFF indicator light
AIR BAG ON indicator light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
138
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification
system
■Adult*1
■Child*3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF
indicator lights On
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag and knee airbag
Activated
Side airbag in the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
on the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF
indicator lights Off*5
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag and knee airbag Deactivated
Side airbag in the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
on the front passenger side Activated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
139
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF
indicator lights
Not illumi-
nated
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag and knee airbag Deactivated
Side airbag in the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
on the front passenger side Activated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Deactivated
140
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■System malfunction
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
*4: Never install a real-facing child restraint system on the front passen-
ger seat. A rear-facing child restraint system should only be installed
on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 143)
*5:In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for
installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 1 4 8)
Indicator/
warning light
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF
indicator lights Off
SRS warning light On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag and knee airbag Deactivated
Side airbag in the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
on the front passenger side Activated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
141
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●Make sure the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure
the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the front passenger side may not activate correctly, which
could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.
●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat.
●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the second seat.
●Do not let a second seat passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a second seat.
This may cause the AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be illuminated, which indi-
cates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe acci-
dent. If the seatback touches the second seat, return the seatback to a position
where it does not touch the second seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as
upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback exces-
sively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
142
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illu-
minated. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up
straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn cor-
rectly. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator still remain illuminated, either ask the pas-
senger to move to the second seat, or if that is not possible, move the front
passenger seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 14 8 )
●Do not modify or remove the front seat.
●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction in the detection sys-
tem. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
●Child restraint systems installed on the second seat should not contact the front
seatbacks.
143
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
●Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropri-
ate to the age and size of the child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 14 8)
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
144
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing—Infant seat/convertible seat
Forward facing—Convertible seat
Booster seat
145
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When installing the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belts.
●If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and
use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 9 1 )
When you have to use a child restraint system
on the front passenger seat, adjust the follow-
ing:
●The seatback to the most upright posi-
tion
●The seat cushion to the fully rearward
and highest position
●The seat belt height to the lowest posi-
tion
146
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Using a child restraint system
The use of a child restraint system not suitable for the vehicle may not properly
secure the infant or child, resulting in serious injury or even death.
■Child restraint precautions
●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the wind-
shield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
●Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light illuminates. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.
●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether
strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether
strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possi-
ble and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the AIR BAG OFF
indicator light illuminates, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
147
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rail from which the
side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop, sudden swerving or accident.
■Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt
becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out
leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■When the child restraint system is not in use
●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
148
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly
secure the child restraints to the outboard second seats using the LATCH
anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child
restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not com-
patible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Child restraint LATCH
anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outboard second seats.
(Buttons displaying the location
of the anchors are attached to
the seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt)
Anchor bracket (for top
tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for all second seats.
149
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Installation with LATCH system
Fold the seatback forward and
then adjust it as upright as possible.
Take off the covers between the
seat cushion and seatback, then
confirm the position of the LATCH
anchors below the symbol in the
seatback.
STEP 1
STEP 2
150
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Type A
Latch the hooks of the
lower straps onto the
LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Canada only
STEP 3
STEP 4
Canada only
STEP 3
STEP 4
151
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function
belt)
■Rear-facing Infant seat/Convertible seat
Fold the seatback while pulling the
seatback angle lever. Return the
seatback and secure it at the first
lock position. (P. 6 6)
Place the child restraint system on
the second seat facing the rear of
the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
152
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly in
order to activate the ALR lock
mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
While pushing the child restraint
system down into the second seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
STEP 4
STEP 5
153
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Forward-facing Convertible seat
Fold the seatback while pulling the
seatback angle lever. Return the
seatback and secure it at the first
lock position. (P. 6 6)
Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
154
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Fully extend the shoulder strap and
then allow it to retract slightly into
the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
While pushing the child restraint
system into the second seat, allow
the shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint system has a top tether strap, the top tether
strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.
(P. 149)
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
155
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Booster seat
Fold the seatback while pulling the
seatback angle lever. Return the
seatback and secure it at the first
lock position.
Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the child
restraint system according to the
manufacturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is cor-
rectly positioned over the child’s
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 9 1 )
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
156
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Secure the child restraint system using a seat belt or LATCH
anchors, and do the following.
Outside
Adjust the head restraint to the
upmost position.
Center
Lower the head restraint to the
lowest position.
STEP 1
157
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether strap.
Outside
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
Center
Outside only: Adjust the head
restraint to the downmost position.
STEP 2
STEP 3
158
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Laws and regulations pertaining to Anchors
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
CAUTION
■When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock
mode: (P. 95)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to
the child.
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passen-
gers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
●If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand second seat.
●Child restraint system installed on the third
seat should not contact the second seat-
backs.
159
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
●When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint system, move the seat as far
back as possible, with the seatback close to the child restraint system.
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from
the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so
may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
●Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
●Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be sure it
is secure.
●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
turer.
■Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or a accident.
●Only put a forward-facing or booster child
seat on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing or
booster child restraint on the front passen-
ger seat, move the seat as far back as possi-
ble even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator
light illuminates. Failing to do so may result
in death or serious injury if the airbags
deploy (inflate).
160
1-7. Safety information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.
Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or
serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden
swerve or accident.
When driving 2
161
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle.................. 162
Engine (ignition) switch......... 172
Automatic transmission ......... 176
Turn signal lever........................ 181
Parking brake........................... 182
Horn............................................ 183
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters................ 184
Indicators and warning
lights ......................................... 187
Multi-information display..... 190
2-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch...................... 193
Fog light switch ........................ 197
Windshield wipers and
washer ..................................... 198
Rear window wiper and
washer ..................................... 201
Headlight cleaner
switch ..................................... 203
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control......................... 204
Dynamic radar cruise
control.................................... 208
Intuitive parking assist.......... 222
Rear view monitor
system..................................... 230
Wide view front &
side monitor.......................... 234
4-Wheel AHC (Active Height
Control Suspension).......... 244
AVS (Adaptive Variable
Suspension) .......................... 255
Four-wheel drive system...... 256
Crawl Control .......................... 261
Driving assist systems........... 265
Pre-Collision System.............. 271
2-5. Driving information
Off-road precautions ............ 276
Cargo and luggage ................ 281
Vehicle load limits.................. 288
Winter driving tips................. 289
Trailer towing .......................... 294
Dinghy towing.......................... 313
162
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■Starting the engine (P. 1 72 )
■Driving
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to “D”.
(P. 1 76)
Release the parking brake. (P. 182 )
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently push the accel-
erator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■Stopping
With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to “P” or “N”. (P. 176)
■Parking the vehicle
With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 182 )
Shift the shift lever to “P”. (P. 1 76 )
When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
163
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Starting on a steep uphill
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to “D”.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because
there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to
observe:
●For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
●For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
164
2-1. Driving procedures
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or
whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding-down.
■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 696)
CAUTION
■When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running.
This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals prop-
erly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an acci-
dent.
165
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may cause a
fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
●Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in “R”.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering perfor-
mance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
●If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check
that the back door is closed.
Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an acci-
dent, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer immediately.
●Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to “P” or “R” while the vehicle
is moving.
Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission and may result in a
loss of vehicle control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to “N” while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the engine brake not to operate properly and lead to an
accident.
●Do not turn the engine off while driving.
The power steering and brake actuator will not operate properly if the engine is
not running.
●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effec-
tiveness. (P. 178 )
166
2-1. Driving procedures
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
●When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
●Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may
result in death or serious injury.
●Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are
not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
●If you drive through deep water over about 20 in. (500 mm) in depth, put the
vehicle height in the high mode with the height select switch and then turn off the
4-Wheel AHC. Drive your vehicle at 18 mph (30 km/h) or lower speed.
167
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
●Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting
or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than “P” or “N”, the vehicle may accelerate sud-
denly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking
brake as necessary.
●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
●Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the
exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is
nearby.
168
2-1. Driving procedures
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is parked
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Failure to do so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical com-
ponents.
●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to “P”, stop the engine and
lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
●If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns
on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disen-
gages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehi-
cle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and
the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in “P”.
You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of
the transfer mode. (P. 2 5 6 )
●Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after
turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build up, or where it is
snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a seri-
ous health hazard.
169
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odor-
less. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such
as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
●The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by
corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehi-
cle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off.
Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator
pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to abnormal engine overheating.
Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may
collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■When braking the vehicle
●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
●If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than
usual. Braking distance may also increase.
●Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the systems
fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
170
2-1. Driving procedures
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving.
If the brake pedal is depressed while driving with the accelerator pedal
depressed, driving torque may be restrained.
●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals
together to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in “P”. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or
the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed.
■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long
time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump.
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-
ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
that of the brake discs are exceeded.
171
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
●The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 668)
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle.
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following.
●Brake function
●Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission,
transfer, differentials, etc.
●Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where
possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
172
2-1. Driving procedures
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on
your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes.
■Starting the engine
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine can be started from
any mode.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started. The engine will
crank until it starts or for up to
30 seconds, whichever is less.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
173
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time
the switch is pressed.)
OFF*
Emergency flashers can be
used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can be
used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position other than “P” when turning off the engine,
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will be turned to ACCESSORY
mode, not to OFF.
174
2-1. Driving procedures
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When the steering lock cannot be released
■If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 116)
■When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
■Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift lever
in “P”, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off.
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 39
■When the electronic key battery is discharged
P. 68 2
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 37
■Note for the entry function
P. 40
The green indicator light on the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will flash and a mes-
sage will be shown on the multi-information
display. Press the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch again while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
175
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the acceler-
ator while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push and
hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in
an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to
an unexpected accident.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
■When starting the engine
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately by your Lexus dealer.
176
2-1. Driving procedures
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Automatic transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■Shifting the shift lever
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON
mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
177
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Shift position uses
*1: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the
“D” position for normal driving.
*2: By selecting shift ranges using “S” mode, you can control engine braking
forces.
■Selecting a driving mode
The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving and
operating conditions.
Power mode
For powerful acceleration and
driving in mountainous regions.
Normal mode
Second start mode
For starting on slippery road
surfaces, such as on snow.
Press “2nd” to return to normal
mode.
Shift position Function
PParking the vehicle or starting the engine
RReversing
NNeutral
DNormal driving*1
S“S” mode driving*2 (P. 178)
178
2-1. Driving procedures
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Changing shift ranges in “S” mode
Shift the shift lever to the “S” position and operate the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in “S” mode is automatically set to “5” or “4” accord-
ing to the vehicle’s speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to “3”
or “2” if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the “D”
position. (P. 1 8 0)
179
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Shift ranges and their functions
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a
higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.
Shift range Function
6Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
5Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
4Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 4
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
3Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 3
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
2Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 2
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
1Setting the gear at 1.
180
2-1. Driving procedures
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■“S” mode
When the shift range is “5” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift
range to “6”.
■Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the “S” mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may some-
times be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.)
■When driving with the cruise control system
The engine brake will not operate in the “S” mode, even when downshifting to “5” or
“4”. (P. 204, 208)
■Second start mode automatic deactivation
Second start mode is automatically deactivated if the engine is turned off after driv-
ing in second start mode.
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”
P. 679
■If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to “S”
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in “D”.)
■AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the
driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the “D” position.
(Shifting the shift lever to the “S” position cancels the function.)
While in power mode, the engine speed may stay high while depressing the accel-
erator pedal and may remain high after releasing the accelerator pedal. This does
not indicate a malfunction.
181
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Turn signal lever
■Turn signals can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever part-
way to signal a lane change.
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever part-
way to signal a lane change.
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
182
2-1. Driving procedures
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Parking brake
■Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 289 )
NOTICE
■Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components over-
heating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
Sets the parking brake
Fully set the parking brake while
depressing the brake pedal.
Releases the parking brake
Slightly raise the lever and lower
it completely while pressing the
button.
CanadaU.S.A.
183
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
184
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target
region.
The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Engine oil pressure gauge
Displays the engine oil pressure.
Voltmeter
Displays the charge state.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Multi-information display
P. 190
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
185
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel light can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Odometer and trip meter
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the
meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and dis-
play different distances independently.
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding
the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.
186
2-2. Instrument cluster
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
●The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the
red zone (“H”). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 688)
■While driving
●When the voltmeter indicates more than 19 V or less than 9 V, the battery may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer.
●When the engine oil pressure gauge does not work properly, immediately stop
the engine and contact your Lexus dealer.
187
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depend-
ing on the target region.
Center panel
188
2-2. Instrument cluster
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehi-
cle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 181)
Crawl Control indicator
(P. 261 )
Headlight high beam indi-
cator (P. 1 93)
Roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off indica-
tor (P. 136)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P. 193 )
“PWR” mode indicator
(P. 177)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 193 )
Automatic transmission
second start indicator
(P. 177)
Fog light indicator
(P. 197 )
Low speed four-wheel
drive indicator light
(P. 256)
“AFS OFF” indicator
(P. 194 )
Center differential lock
indicator (P. 256 )
Cruise control indicator
(P. 204 208)
Security indicator
(P. 116118)
(if equipped)
Intuitive parking assist
indicator (P. 222)
Easy access mode indica-
tor (P. 247)
Slip indicator (P. 266) “AIR BAG ON/OFF”
indicator (P. 137 )
*2
*3
*1, 2
*3
*1, 3
189
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as Multi Terrain ABS and the SRS airbag warning
light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are
not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or seri-
ous injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this
occurs.
■Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehi-
cle’s systems. (P. 649)
*1: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few sec-
onds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on,
or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer for details.
*2: The light comes on when the system is turned off.
*3: The light flashes faster than usual to indicate that the system is operating.
*4: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
(U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada)
(U.S.A.) (Canada) (if equipped)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1, 4
*4
*1, 4
190
2-2. Instrument cluster
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-
related data.
●Trip information (P. 1 9 1 )
Displays driving range, fuel con-
sumption and other cruising-
related information.
●Intuitive parking assist display
(P. 223)
Automatically displayed when
using intuitive parking assist.
●Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol display (if equipped)
(P. 20 8)
Automatically displayed when
using dynamic radar cruise con-
trol.
●4-Wheel AHC display
(P. 245)
●Crawl Control display
(P. 261 )
Automatically displayed when
using Crawl Control.
●Shift position and shift range
(P. 178 )
●Warning messages
(P. 660)
Automatically displayed when a
malfunction occurs in one of the
vehicle’s system.
191
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Switch the display
Display items can be switched by
pressing the “DISP” switch.
Trip information
■Outside temperature
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from -22F (-30C) to
122F (50C).
■Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
■Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refu-
eled.
■Driving range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the
quantity of fuel remaining.
●This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from
that displayed.
●When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display
may not be updated.
192
2-2. Instrument cluster
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started.
■Driving distance
Displays the driving distance since the engine was started.
■Tire inflation pressure
Displays inflation pressure of each tire. There is no correlation between
the order of the displayed values and the tire positions.
It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may
also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation
pressure has been adjusted.
■System check display
After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
“CHECKING” is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system
check is complete, the normal screen will return.
■Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be
different from the values measured using other gauges.
■Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is character-
istic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem to continue using the display.
NOTICE
■The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal informa-
tion display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
193
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
The headlights, daytime
running lights and all
lights listed above turn
on and off automati-
cally.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
in IGNITION ON
mode.)
The daytime running
lights turn on.
Canada
U.S.A.
194
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever forward to turn on the high
beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
Release the lever to turn them off.
You can flash the high beams with
the headlights on or off.
AFS
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) improves visibility at intersections
and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light axis of
the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire
angle that are controlled by steering input.
Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher
■Deactivating AFS
On/off
The indicator turns on when the
AFS is deactivated.
195
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Daytime running light system
●To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on auto-
matically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking
brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
●Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers
greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel
economy.
■Headlight control sensor
■Automatic light off system
●When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after a door is opened and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has
been switched to ACCESSORY or OFF mode.
●When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY or OFF mode
and driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION
ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to the or
position.
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-
shield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
196
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■If the “AFS OFF” indicator flashes
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■Customization
Settings of the light sensor sensitivity can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 71 8)
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
197
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain
or fog. The fog lights can be used when the headlights are on low beam.
Off
On
198
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Windshield wipers and washer
With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the
sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
Rain-sensing wiper operation
Low speed wiper operation
High speed wiper operation
Temporary operation
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers operate automatically.
(After operating several times,
the wipers operate one more
time after a short delay to pre-
vent dripping.)
199
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
Vehicle speed affects the wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay
until drip prevention wiper sweep occurs) even when the wipers are not in “AUTO”
mode.
With selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermit-
tent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, the mode cannot be switched when the adjustment band for the sensor
sensitivity is set to the highest position.)
■“A U TO ” m o d e
●If the wiper switch is turned to “AUTO” position while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wiper will operate once to show
that “AUTO” mode is activated.
●If the temperature of the rain drop sensor is 176F (80C) or higher, or 14F
(-10C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the
wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.
●The raindrop sensor judges the amount of
raindrops.
●The sensitivity of sensor can be adjusted by
twisting the band.
Sensor sensitivity (high)
Sensor sensitivity (low)
200
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
■Windshield wiper features
The rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers automatically turn on
when you operate the wipers.
CAUTION
■Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or
anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
201
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Rear window wiper and washer
Intermittent window wiper
operation
Normal window wiper oper-
ation
Washer/wiper dual operation
Washer/wiper dual operation
202
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Dripping prevention wiper sweep
After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more
time after a short delay to prevent dripping.
■Effect of vehicle and shift position on wiper operation
●With selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to inter-
mittent wiper operation only the vehicle is stationary.
●With or selected, the rear window wiper sweeps once when you
shift the shift lever to “R” while windshield wipers operating or with 17 seconds
from their deactivation.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 71 8)
NOTICE
■When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.
203
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Headlight cleaner switch
: If equipped
■The headlight cleaner can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight
switch is turned on.
NOTICE
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the
washer fluid pump to overheat.
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
204
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
: If equipped
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelera-
tor.
Indicator
Cruise control switch
■Set the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and push the
lever down to set the cruise
control speed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
205
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is obtained.
Fine adjustment of the set speed
(approximately 1.0 mph [1.6
km/h]) can be made by lightly
pushing the lever up or down
and releasing it.
■Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
Cancel
Pull the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
206
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Cruise control can be set when
●The shift lever is in “D” or “4”, “5” or “6” range of “S”.
●Vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
■Automatic cruise control cancelation
The set speed is automatically canceled in any of the following situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●VSC is activated
●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●The switching operation continues for 5 seconds or more after the center dif-
ferential lock switch has been operated.
■If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once, and then press the button again to reactivate the
system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Con-
tact your Lexus dealer and have your Lexus inspected.
207
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●On winding roads
●When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
208
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Dynamic radar cruise control
: If equipped
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates
in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
Indicator
Display
Cruise control switch
Distance switch
209
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Set the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button once more to
deactivate.
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and press the
lever down to set.
STEP 1
STEP 2
210
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Press the “ON-OFF” button
to activate the cruise control.
Press the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
Switch to constant speed
control mode. (Push the lever
away from you and hold for
approximately 1 second.)
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode is always reset when
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is switched to IGNITION
ON mode.
■Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is displayed.
In the constant speed control
mode, fine adjustment of the set
speed (approximately 1.0 mph
[1.6 km/h]) can be made by
lightly pressing the lever up or
down and releasing it.
211
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Canceling and resuming the speed setting
Cancel
Pull the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled
when the brake pedal is
depressed.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
Resuming is available when
vehicle speed is approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
■Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Each press of the switch
changes the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance.
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is automatically set to the long
mode when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is set to
IGNITION ON mode.
A mark will be displayed to indi-
cate the presence of the vehicle
if a vehicle is running ahead of
you.
Preceding vehicle mark
212
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Cruising in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles
within 400 ft. (120 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your
vehicle and those vehicles.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long down-
hill slopes.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the set speed by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch.
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the sys-
tem automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in
vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone
warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your
vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.
213
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer vehicles driving slower than the set speed in
the lane ahead
When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly
accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to
fixed speed cruising.
Approach warning
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient auto-
matic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will
flash and buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would
be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle.
Apply the brakes to ensure appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■Warning lights and messages for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 660)
■Switching modes
The mode cannot be switched to constant speed control mode if vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode has been used. The mode also cannot be switched from
constant speed control to vehicle-to-vehicle control mode. Turn the system off by
pressing the “ON-OFF” button, and turn it on again.
214
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■The dynamic radar cruise can be set when
●The shift lever is in “D” or the “4”, “5” or “6” range of “S”.
●Vehicle speed is more than approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may
decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
■Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the follow-
ing situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)
●VSC is activated
●The windshield wipers are operating at high speed
●The driving mode select switch is set to second start mode
●The switching operation continues for 5 seconds or more after the center dif-
ferential lock switch has been operated.
●The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving must be reset by turning the “ON-
OFF” button on again.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
215
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Automatically canceling constant speed control
The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.
●Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
preset vehicle speed
●Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)
●VSC is activated
●The switching operation continues for 5 seconds or more after the center dif-
ferential lock switch has been operated.
■Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond
to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/
decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
216
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Radar sensor and grille cover
If the dynamic radar cruise control is used on a road with very light traffic and very
little to reflect the radar waves emitted by the radar sensor, the system may decide
that the radar sensor is dirty, even if the sensor is not actually dirty. In this case,
switch to the conventional constant speed control mode. (P. 210)
■Approach warning
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not occur:
●When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehicle’s speed
●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
●Immediately after the cruise control speed has been set
●At the instant the accelerator is applied
Always keep the sensor and grille cover
clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some
obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruc-
tion sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if
an obstruction is detected.
217
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
218
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not
appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle
and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.
■Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determin-
ing the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated
vehicle travelling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive
driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It
is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
●Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle travelling ahead is
appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to deter-
mine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
●Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision
with a vehicle travelling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in
order to ensure the safety of all involved.
■To avoid operating the dynamic radar cruise control by mistake
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
219
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep downhills, where there are sudden changes between sharp up and
down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●At entrances to expressways
●When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)
●When the approach warning buzzer can be heard often
●When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
220
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the prox-
imity alarm (P. 213) will not be activated, and an accident may result.
●Vehicles that cut in suddenly
●Vehicles traveling at low speeds
●Vehicles that are not moving
●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.
●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
●When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.)
●When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
●When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
●When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
221
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly
Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sen-
sor not to function correctly and could result an accident.
●Stick or attach anything to them
●Leave them dirty
●Disassemble, or subject them to strong shocks
●Modify or paint them
●Replace them with non-genuine parts
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
●Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille or surrounding area.
●Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille.
222
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Intuitive parking assist
: If equipped
Intuitive parking assist uses sensors in the corners and rear of the vehicle to
detect the distance between the vehicle and any obstacles, and informs the
driver of this distance using the multi-information display, the touch screen,
and warning beeps.
■Sensor types
Front corner sensors
Rear corner sensors
Back sensors
■Intuitive parking assist switch
On/off
To turn the system on, press the
switch. The indicator light
comes on to inform the driver
that the system is operational.
To turn the system off, press the
switch again.
223
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Multi-information display
Front corner sensor detec-
tion
Rear corner sensor detection
Back sensor detection
■Touch screen
When the rear view monitor
system or the wide view front
& side monitor is not dis-
played
The graphic is automatically dis-
played when an obstacle is
detected. The screen can be set
so that the graphic is not dis-
played. (P. 332)
When the rear view monitor
system or the wide view front
& side monitor is displayed
(insert display)
A simplified image is displayed
on the touch screen when an
obstacle is detected.
224
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Sensor detection display, obstacle distance
■Corner sensors
Approximate
distance to obstacle
Multi-
information
display
Touch screen
Insert display
Front:
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.6 ft. (47.5 cm)
Rear:
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.2 ft. (37.5 cm)
(continuous) (continuous) (blinking)
Front:
1.6 ft. (47.5 cm) to
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
Rear:
1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) to
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
(continuous) (continuous)
(blinking rapidly)
Front:
Less than
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
Rear:
Less than
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
(blinking) (continuous) (continuous)
225
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Back sensors
Approximate distance
to obstacle
Multi-information
display
To u c h scree n
(insert display)
4.9 ft. (150 cm) to
2.0 ft. (60 cm)
(continuous) (blinking slowly)
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm)
(continuous) (blinking)
1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(continuous) (blinking rapidly)
Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(blinking) (continuous)
226
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Beeps and obstacle distance
A beep sounds when the corner sensors and back sensors are operating.
●The beep sounds faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle,
the beep sounds continuously.
• Front corner and back sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
• Rear corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
●When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the beep
system responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within
the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast
beeps.
227
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Obstacle detection range
About 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
About 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
The detection area of the sensors is
shown to the left. If obstacles move
too close to the sensors, they will
not be detected.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object etc.
■The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
●Front corner sensors:
• The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than “P”.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
●Rear corner and back sensors:
• The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in “R”.
228
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Sensor detection information
●Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this
may occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensor will resolve this
problem.)
• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the sensor will resolve this problem.)
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• When driving on bumpy, sloped or gravel roads, or over grass.
• If there is something producing ultrasonic waves nearby, such as another
vehicle’s horn, motorcycle engine noise, air braking sound from heavy-duty
vehicles, or another vehicle using the park assist system.
• In heavy rain, or if water is splashed on the sensors.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• If a commercial fender pole or radio antenna is installed.
• If moving towards a high curb or a curb corner.
• If towing eyelet is installed on your vehicle.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they
are.
●The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particu-
lar attention to the following obstacles.
• Thin objects such as wire, fencing or rope.
• Objects that absorb sound waves, such as cotton or snow.
• Objects with sharp corners.
•Low objects.
• Objects where the upper section projects out over the lower section.
229
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■If a message is displayed on the multi-information display
P. 66 0
■When there is a malfunction
In the following cases, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
●If the bumper is damaged.
●If the intuitive parking assist indicator light remains on without a beep sounds.
■Warning beep volume and touch screen settings
You can change the warning beep volume etc. (P. 33 2)
CAUTION
■When using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possi-
bly cause an accident.
●Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
●When moving forward or reversing, always check your surroundings for safety
and drive carefully.
●Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.
NOTICE
■When washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
230
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of
the view behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed in
reverse on the screen. This allows the image to appear in the same manner
as that of the rear view mirror.
Rear view image is displayed
when the shift lever is in “R”.
If you move the lever out of “R”,
the screen returns to the previ-
ous one.
231
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Displayed area
■Rear view monitor system camera
The area covered by the camera is limited.
Objects which are close to either corner of
the bumper or under the bumper cannot be
seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to vehicle orientation or road con-
ditions.
Corners of bumper
In the following cases, it may be difficult to
see the images on the screen, even when the
system is functioning correctly.
• In the dark (e.g. at night).
• If the temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low.
• If water droplets get on the camera, or
when humidity is high (e.g. when it rains).
• If foreign matter (e.g. snow or mud) get
on the camera lens.
• If the sun or headlights are shining directly
into the camera lens.
232
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Smear effect
■Flicker effect
When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, or mercury lights
etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
If a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by
the camera, a smear effect* peculiar to the
camera may occur.
*: Smear effect — A phenomenon that occurs
when a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up
by the camera; when transmitted by the
camera, the light source appears to have a
vertical streak above and below it.
233
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■When using the rear view monitor system
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or
serious injuries.
●Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.
●Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.
●Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual dis-
tances.
●Do not use the system if the back door is not completely closed.
■Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
●If the back of the vehicle is hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle may
change. Contact your Lexus dealer.
●Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in
cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
●If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and
wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.
●The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted
when the system is cold.
●When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera
or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
234
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Wide view front & side monitor
: If equipped
This system can display the wide view front monitor and the side monitor
separately or at the same time.
The wide view front monitor uses a super-wide angle lens to display on
screen the areas to the left and right of the vehicle and the blind spots to the
front of the vehicle. This system helps the driver check for approaching
cars, bicycles and pedestrians when at intersections with poor visibility.
The side monitor uses a camera installed in the passenger’s side outside
rear view mirror to display on screen the area to the front-right of the vehi-
cle, helping the driver check this area.
On/off
The simultaneous display screen
is displayed when the “VIEW”
switch is pressed.
235
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Display
■Wide view front & side monitor simultaneous display
Both the wide view front monitor and the side monitor are displayed on
one screen. When switching to the wide view front & side monitors this
screen is displayed first, regardless of the screen mode.
Wide view front monitor
Side monitor
■Wide view front monitor
The image from the front camera is displayed. Use this monitor to help
check the area in front of the vehicle for safety, for example in intersec-
tions with poor visibility.
236
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Side monitor
The image from the side camera is displayed (the right front view is
expanded and displayed). Use this monitor to help check the area to
the right of the vehicle, for example when taking off and stopping,
when turning right, etc.
237
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Changing the screen mode
This system has a 2 screen mode and a 3 screen mode.
2 screen mode: Only the wide view front & side monitor simultaneous dis-
play can be used.
3 screen mode: The wide view front & side monitor simultaneous display or
the individual display can be used. The display can be switched between the
simultaneous display and the individual display by operating the “VIEW”
switch.
The screen mode is changed from
the wide view front & side monitor
simultaneous display screen. The
screen mode will change as the
or buttons
are touched.
If the screen is changed to the wide
view front & side monitor simulta-
neous display screen while the
Lexus parking assist monitor is dis-
played, it is not possible to switch to
the 3 screen mode. (The switch is
not displayed.)
238
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Changing the display in 3 screen mode
When in 3 screen mode, you can change the display from the simulta-
neous display to each individual display.
The screen changes as follows with each press of the “VIEW” switch.
When the wide view front monitor was displayed the previous time:
When the side monitor was displayed the previous time:
The wide view front monitor and side monitor individual displays are not
accessible when the shift lever is in “R”.
■Automatic display mode
You can set the automatic display mode, which automatically changes
the display.
Touch “AUTO”.
When automatic display mode is on, you can have the system display auto-
matically in the following situations:
●When the shift lever is in “N”, “D” or “S”.
●When the shift lever is in a position other than “R”, and the vehicle speed
is approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
“AUTO” will not be displayed when the shift lever is in “R”.
Wide view front & side monitor simultaneous display
Side monitor Wide view front monitor
Wide view front & side monitor simultaneous display
Wide view front monitor Side monitor
239
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■The wide view front & side monitor can be operated when
●The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
●The vehicle speed is less than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
■Automatic system cancelation
In the following situations, the system is canceled automatically.
●When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 7 mph (12 km/h).
●When the shift lever is in “R”.
■When the outside rear view mirrors have been folded
The side monitor screen can be displayed even if the outside rear view mirrors have
been folded. In this case, there will be a slight difference between the image dis-
played when the outside rear view mirrors are extended and when the outside rear
view mirrors have been folded.
If the side monitor is displayed while the outside rear view mirrors are folded, you
cannot check the area near the front edge of the vehicle as the base of the outside
rear view mirrors will be in the way.
■When switched to from the Lexus parking assist monitor
If the wide view front & side monitor is
switched to from the Lexus parking assist
monitor, the icon display area will flash to
inform the driver that the currently displayed
area is the front or side. The icon display area
will continue to flash until the screen is turned
off.
240
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Displayed area
Front camera
Masking
This section is masked to prevent the
driver from moving the vehicle while
watching only the wide view front monitor
screen. The driver must visually confirm
this area directly.
Camera’s field of view
Objects visible to the camera
Objects not visible to the camera
Parts of the vehicle (bumper, grill, etc.)
241
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Side camera
The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects which are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road
conditions.
■Wide view front & side monitor cameras
In the following cases, it may be difficult to see the images on the screen, even when
the system is functioning correctly.
• In the dark (e.g. at night).
• If the temperature near the lens is extremely high or low.
• If water droplets get on the camera, or when humidity is high (e.g. when it rains).
• If foreign matter (e.g. snow or mud) get on the camera lens.
• If the sun or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens.
• If the camera lens is damaged by flying stones.
Camera’s field of view
Objects visible to the camera
Right side of vehicle
Side camera
Front camera
242
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Smear effect
■Flicker effect
When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, or mercury lights
etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
CAUTION
■When using the wide view front & side monitor system
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or
serious injuries.
●Never depend solely on the monitor system.
●Always check visually to confirm your intended path is clear.
●Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual dis-
tances.
●Do not use the system if the hood or the front passenger’s door is not completely
closed.
If a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by
the camera, a smear effect* peculiar to the
camera may occur.
*: Smear effect – A phenomenon that occurs
when a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up
by the camera; when transmitted by the
camera, the light source appears to have a
vertical streak above and below it. The
vertical streak also appears in the masked
areas.
243
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Conditions which may affect the wide view front & side monitor system
●If the front of the vehicle or the passenger side outside rear view mirror is hit, the
camera’s position and mounting angle may change. Contact your Lexus dealer.
●Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in
cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
●If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and
wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.
●The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted
when the system is cold.
●Situations unsuitable for wide view front & side monitor
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow.
• When using tire chains or emergency tires.
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
●When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera
or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
NOTICE
■When using the wide view front & side monitor
Even if an obstacle is no longer visible on the side monitor, do not turn the steering
wheel further in the direction the vehicle is turning until the vehicle has moved com-
pletely past the obstacle. If the steering wheel is turned to full lock, the vehicle will
turn in the smallest possible turning circle, and may collide with the obstacle.
244
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
4-Wheel AHC (Active Height Control Suspension)
The 4-Wheel AHC adjusts the vehicle height in accordance with driving
conditions. There are 3 selectable modes, “HI” (high), “N” (normal), and
“LO” (low).
Easy access mode switch
Height control switch
Height select switch
245
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Selecting vehicle height
Higher
Lower
Display
Current mode
The vehicle is in the “N” (normal)
height mode in the illustration.
and show directions in which it
is possible to adjust the vehicle
height.
Height up
Height down
Height control “OFF” indicator
When the height control “OFF”
indicator is displayed, the vehicle
height will not change even if the
height select switches are oper-
ated.
246
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Vehicle height modes
Push the height select switch to “” to step up one height mode, and pull
to “” to step down one height mode. (Ex. When in the low height mode,
push to “” once to switch to the normal height mode, and twice to switch
to the high height mode.)
■“HI” (high) height mode
Vehicle height is about 2.0 in. (50 mm) higher at the front, and about
2.4 in. (60 mm) higher at the rear than the normal mode height.
This mode is suitable when driving on bumpy roads or through water.
High height mode is only available when the vehicle speed is under 18
mph (30 km/h).
■“N” (normal) height mode
The standard vehicle height. This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.
When driving at high speeds, the vehicle height is automatically low-
ered by 0.8 in. (20 mm) in the front and 0.6 in. (15 mm) in the rear, to
ensure excellent aerodynamic characteristics and stability.
If the vehicle speed drops to 50 mph (80 km/h) or less, normal mode
is automatically resumed.
■“LO” (low) height mode
Vehicle height is about 2.4 in. (60 mm) lower at the front, and about 1.6
in. (40 mm) lower at the rear than the normal mode height.
This mode allows easy access to the vehicle.
Low height mode is only available when the vehicle is stopped. When
the vehicle speed exceeds 7 mph (12 km/h), normal height mode is
automatically selected.
247
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Conditions for changing the vehicle height mode
Some modes may not be selectable depending on the vehicle speed
when the four-wheel drive control switch is in the “H4” position. Refer to
the following table.
Easy access mode
You can select this mode for easy
access and easy loading of the
vehicle.
If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to OFF mode when this mode is
on, the vehicle height is lowered automatically.
When the vehicle begins to lower a beep will sound twice, and while the vehicle
is lowering the indicator light will flash to alert the driver and surrounding people
that the vehicle is lowering.
Low mode Normal mode High mode
Under 7 mph (12 km/h) Ye s Ye s Ye s
7 mph (12 km/h) to
18 mph (30 km/h) No Ye s Ye s
18 mph (30 km/h) or over No Ye s No
248
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
The indicator light stops blinking, and comes on continuously to indicate that the
shift is completed.
Easy access mode is available if the following conditions have been met:
• The vehicle height mode is in normal mode.
• The vehicle is stopped on a flat surface.
• The shift lever is in “P”.
The following method will cancel the vehicle lowering operation and raise the
vehicle again:
• Press the height control switch.
• Push the height select switch to “”.
Disabling the height control
Push while the vehicle is stopped.
The “OFF” indicator will appear on
the multi-information display, and
the vehicle height will be fixed in
the current mode. Push the switch
again to turn the system back on.
■Operating conditions
●The engine must be running.
●All side doors and the back door must be closed.
249
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Automatic change in vehicle height when the four-wheel drive control switch is in
the “L4” position
If the vehicle speed exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h) while driving on an uneven road with
the four-wheel drive control switch in the “L4” position, high mode is automatically
selected. (On even roads, the height mode will not change.)
■Automatic change in vehicle height when in the high mode
●If the vehicle speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h) with the four-wheel drive con-
trol switch in the “H4” position, normal mode is automatically selected.
●If the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) with the four-wheel drive con-
trol switch in the “L4” position, the vehicle height is lowered to 1.0 in. (25 mm)
higher than the normal mode height. If the vehicle speed drops to 12 mph (20
km/h) or less, high mode is automatically resumed.
■Extra high mode
If the vehicle becomes stuck or the Crawl Control system requests the vehicle
height be raised, extra high mode may be automatically selected when the vehicle
height is in high mode with the four-wheel drive control switch in the “L4” position.
The vehicle height is raised to 0.8 in. (20 mm) higher than the high mode height, or
slightly higher.
●Extra high mode will change back to high mode when:
• The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h)
• The four-wheel drive control switch is shifted to “H4”.
●If you pull the height select switch to “” when in extra high mode, normal mode
is selected.
●Extra high mode cannot be manually selected.
■Turning off the 4-Wheel AHC
●The system will remain off until the height control “OFF” switch is pushed again,
even if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off.
●Even if the system is turned off, the system automatically modulated if the vehi-
cle speed exceeds following.
• 18 mph (30 km/h) with high or low mode
• 50 mph (80 km/h) with normal mode
250
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■If the vehicle travels at high speed while in normal mode
The vehicle’s height will automatically lower by 0.8 in. (20 mm) at the front and 0.6
in. (15 mm) at the rear. If the vehicle’s speed decreases, the vehicle’s height automat-
ically returns to normal.
If the vehicle is loaded with heavy items, a shock may be felt at this time.
■When driving on bumpy roads with the four-wheel drive control switch in “L4”
High mode is automatically selected.
■Automatic leveling function
The vehicle is adjusted to a fixed height for each mode, regardless of the number of
occupants and the luggage load.
●However the vehicle cannot be raised if the vehicle load exceeds the following
limits:
• Up to 4 occupants* plus approximately 706 lb. (320 kg) in the normal mode
• Up to 4 occupants* plus approximately 419 lb. (190 kg) in the high mode
*: average weight 150 lb. (68 kg) per person
●If the vehicle height cannot be raised when in the normal mode, and “LO”
appears on the display, the vehicle is loaded too heavily. Take extra care when
driving in this condition.
If the vehicle height cannot be raised even after unloading the vehicle, pull the
height select switch to “” then push to “”. If the vehicle height still cannot be
raised, turn the ignition off then on again, then try once more.
■When the vehicle is stopped during driving
The activation of the automatic leveling function may cause the vehicle height to
change. This is not a malfunction.
■If the vehicle height does not change
If the vehicle is loaded too heavily, or the undercarriage has come into contact with
the road surface, the vehicle height cannot be raised/lowered.
251
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■In the following cases the 4-Wheel AHC will not operate
●The brake pedal has been depressed for a few seconds or longer while the vehi-
cle is stopped. (Except when the four-wheel drive control switch is in “L4”.)
●The suspension fluid temperature is lower than -22°F (-30°C).
●Driving on bumpy roads which may cause the suspension to fully elongate.
●If the steering wheel is abruptly turned more than 3/4 of a revolution with the
center differential lock system activated.
■Cold weather operation
It may take longer for the vehicle height to change if the suspension fluid tempera-
ture drops below -5°F (-15°C).
The 4-Wheel AHC does not operate when the suspension fluid temperature drops
below -22°F (-30°C).
●In this case, even if the height select switch is pressed, the vehicle height will not
change. Once the engine has warmed the suspension fluid to within normal
operating limits, the 4-Wheel AHC will begin operating and the vehicle height
will automatically change to the selected mode.
●When the suspension fluid is around -22°F (-30°C), the vehicle height may not
be able to be raised, even if the 4-Wheel AHC is operating. In this case, pull the
height select switch to “” then push to “” after further warming the engine to
select the desired vehicle height.
■Parking and stopping tips
●If you immediately stop the engine after off-road driving, or park the vehicle for
a long time, the vehicle height may gradually lower. When parking, make sure
there is nothing under the vehicle that may come in contact with the underbody.
The vehicle will return to the set height when the engine is started.
●The vehicle height may change as the temperature changes when the engine is
stopped. The vehicle will return to the set height when the engine is started.
252
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Propeller shaft noise
If the vehicle height is adjusted on a slope, or with the shift lever in a position other
than “P” or “N” while the vehicle is stopped, you may hear a sound caused by the
expansion and contraction of the propeller shaft. This does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
■Continued system operation
Even if the engine is stopped while the vehicle height is being lowered, operation
will continue for up to 30 seconds.
■4-Wheel AHC failure warning
If a malfunction occurs in the 4-Wheel AHC or AVS system, normal mode is auto-
matically selected. However, the system may not switch to normal mode depending
on the location of the malfunction.
The warning message is displayed on the multi-information display, and the 4-
Wheel AHC cannot be activated until the malfunction is corrected.
Stop the engine and start it again. If the warning message turns off, the system is
operating correctly. If the warning message continues to be displayed, have the
vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
253
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Using the high mode
These modes should only be used for rough off-road conditions. Because the vehi-
cle’s center of gravity is higher when in these modes, the vehicle may become
unstable when turning abruptly, resulting in an accident.
■When jacking up the vehicle or installing tire chains
Turn off the 4-Wheel AHC and stop the engine, otherwise the vehicle height may
change due to the automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident.
■When driving through water deeper than 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
Select the high mode and turn off the 4-Wheel AHC. Drive at 18 mph (30 km/h) or
lower. Otherwise the vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling func-
tion, resulting in an accident.
■If your vehicle must be towed
Put the vehicle height in the normal mode and turn off the 4-Wheel AHC, other-
wise the vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function, resulting
in an accident.
■If your vehicle becomes stuck in a ditch
Turn off the 4-Wheel AHC, otherwise the vehicle height may change due to the
automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident.
254
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■To avoid damage to the vehicle
●After unloading, the vehicle height may be slightly higher than normal. Take care
when overhead height is limited.
●Before lowering the vehicle height, check that no-one is under the vehicle and
the area is free of obstructions. Also check that the underbody of the vehicle will
not touch the ground.
●Do not select the low mode when driving on bumpy roads, as the underbody of
the vehicle may contact the road surface.
●When travelling on bumpy roads or through water, or when towing, turn off easy
access mode.
■Avoid rapid changes to the vehicle height
As the pump may overheat. Leave at a few seconds between selections when
changing the vehicle height mode.
255
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension)
■Driving mode
●Mode is suitable for ordinary driving.
●Mode is suitable for heavy load or driving on a unpaved road.
●With the four-wheel drive control switch at “L4”, the damping effect suitable for
off-road driving will be provided.
AVS controls the suspension according to the road and driving conditions.
Selecting an optimum driving mode allows good riding comfort and stabil-
ity.
For driving on a bumpy road
For ordinary driving such as
in the city traffic
For sporty type driving such
as on winding mountain
roads and high speed driving
256
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Four-wheel drive system
Use the four-wheel drive control switch and center differential lock/unlock
switch to select the following transfer and center differential modes.
■Four-wheel drive control switch
“H4” (high speed position)
Normal driving on all types of
roads.
“L4” (low speed position)
Driving requiring maximum
power and traction such as
climbing or descending steep
hills, off-road driving, and hard
pulling in sand or mud, etc.
■Center differential lock/unlock switch
Lock the center differential
when your vehicle’s wheels get
stuck in a ditch or when driving
on a slippery or bumpy surface.
Unlock the center differential
after the wheels have been
freed, or after moving to a flat,
non-slippery surface.
257
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Shifting between “H4” and “L4”
■Shifting from “H4” to “L4”
Stop the vehicle completely.
Shift the shift lever to “N”.
Push and shift the four-wheel drive control switch to “L4”.
Maintain this condition until the low speed four-wheel drive indicator
light turns on.
■Shifting from “L4” to “H4”
Stop the vehicle completely.
Shift the shift lever to “N”.
Shift the four-wheel drive control switch to “H4”.
Maintain this condition until the low speed four-wheel drive indicator
light turns off.
■The four-wheel drive control switch can be operated when
●The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
●The shift lever is in the “N” position.
●The vehicle is stopped completely.
■The low speed four-wheel drive indicator light
The indicator light blinks while shifting between “H4” and “L4”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
258
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Advice for driving on slippery roads
●If you shift the four-wheel drive control switch to “L4” and the shift lever to the
“2” range of “S” while driving in steep off-road areas, the output of the brake can
be controlled effectively by the Active TRAC, which assists the driver to control
the driving power of 4 wheels.
●Use the “1” range of “S” of the shift lever for maximum power and traction when
your wheels get stuck or when driving down a steep incline.
■The center differential lock indicator light
The indicator light blinks while locking/unlocking the center differential.
■The center differential lock/unlock button can be operated when
●The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
●The vehicle speed is less than 60 mph (100 km/h).
■Locking/unlocking the center differential
●When the center differential is locked, VSC is automatically turned off. (The
center differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator lights come on.)
●If the operation is not completed, the center differential lock indicator blinks. If
the indicator light does not turn off when unlocking the center differential, drive
straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
●If the center differential lock/unlock is not completed within 5 seconds while the
cruise control system is on, cancel the cruise control system.
259
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock
indicator light blinks
●If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light continues to blink when using
the four-wheel drive control switch, stop the vehicle completely, move the shift
lever to “N” and operate the switch again.
●If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns
on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode dis-
engages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the
vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks
and the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in “P”.
You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of
the transfer mode.
To complete the shifting, stop the vehicle completely, return the shift lever to “N”,
and confirm that the shift was completed (the indicator turns on/off).
●If the engine coolant temperature is too low, the four-wheel drive control system
may not be able to shift. When the engine is warmer operate the switch again.
If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock indi-
cator light continues to blink even after attempting the above, there may be a mal-
function in the engine, the brake system or the four-wheel drive system. In this case,
you may not be able to shift between “H4” and “L4”, and the center differential lock
may not be operable. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
260
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■While driving
Never move the four-wheel drive control switch if the wheels have lost traction.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■When the vehicle is parked
If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns on/
off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages
both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to
move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the
buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in “P”. You
or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the
transfer mode. (P. 256)
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the center differential
●For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, unlock the center differential.
●Unlock the center differential after the wheels are out of the ditch or off the slip-
pery or bumpy surface.
●Do not push the center differential lock/unlock button when the vehicle is turning
or when its wheels are spinning freely off the ground.
261
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Crawl Control
Allows travel on extremely rough off-road surfaces at a fixed low speed
without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal. Minimizes loss of traction
or vehicle slip when driving on slippery road surfaces, allowing for stable
driving.
■Crawl Control switch
On/off
The Crawl Control indicator is
lit and the slip indicator flashes
when operating.
Speed selection switch
Low mode
Effective when traveling on
rocks and pebbles.*
Medium mode
Effective when traveling on
snow mounds or descending a
slope of rubble.*
High mode
Effective when ascending a
slope of rubble, or traveling on
snow, dirt, mud, sand, gravel,
grass etc.*
*: Depending on the road surface,
may not be the most effective.
262
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
When the system is turned off
If the system is turned off when Crawl Control is operating, the slip indi-
cator turns off, and the Crawl Control indicator flashes until the system
has turned off completely. When turning off Crawl Control while travel-
ing, stop the vehicle before the Crawl Control indicator turns off, or drive
extremely carefully.
■The Crawl Control can be operated when
●The engine is running.
●The shift lever is in any gear other than “P” or “N”.
●The four-wheel drive control switch is in “L4”.
●The driver’s door is closed.
263
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Automatic system cancelation
In either of the following situations, a buzzer sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
The Crawl Control indicator goes off after the system has automatically turned off:
●When the shift lever is moved to “P”.
●When the four-wheel drive control switch is in “H4”.
In either of the following situations, a buzzer sounds for approximately 3 seconds,
the Crawl Control indicator blinks, and the control will decrease gradually. The
Crawl Control indicator goes off after the system has automatically turned off:
●When the shift lever is moved to “N”.
●If the driver’s door is opened.
■Function limitations
●In the following situations, brake control can be used to drive downhill at a con-
stant speed. However, engine control is not available when driving uphill at a
constant speed.
• When switched to second start mode
• When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
●In the following situation, engine control and brake control will be temporarily
canceled.
• When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).
■If the brake system overheats
The system will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)
■If the automatic transmission system overheats
The system will cease operation, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be
displayed, or the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light will come
on to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place until the warning message or
the warning light turns off.
264
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the Crawl Control system
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred in Crawl Control system.
●Either of the following conditions may occur when the Crawl Control system is
operating. None of these are indicators that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
CAUTION
■When using Crawl Control
Do not rely solely on the Crawl Control. This function does not extend the vehicle’s
performance limitations. Always thoroughly check the road conditions, and drive
safely.
■These conditions may cause the system not to operate properly
When driving on the following surfaces, the system may not be able to maintain a
fixed low speed, which may result in an accident:
●Extremely steep inclines.
●Extremely uneven surfaces.
●Snow-covered roads, or other slippery surfaces.
265
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■Multi Terrain ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface, or in off-
road conditions (such as rough roads, sand and mud).
■Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
■Active TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the 4 wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■Hill-start assist control
Helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an
incline or slippery slope. The hill-start assist control only operate for 5 sec-
onds when engaged.
■VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering)
Adjusts the wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed and
steering wheel movement.
■Pre-Collision System (if equipped)
P. 27 1
266
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
When the VSC/Active TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are oper-
ating
If the vehicle is in danger of slip-
ping, rolling backwards when
starting on an incline, or if the
wheels spin, the slip indicator light
flashes to indicate that the VSC/
Active TRAC/hill-start assist con-
trol systems have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC or hill-start assist
control is operating.
The stop lights and high mounted
stoplight turn on when the hill-start
assist control system is operating.
267
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
To disable Active TRAC and/or VSC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, Active TRAC and VSC sys-
tem may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to
turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■Turning off Active TRAC
Quickly push and release the but-
ton to turn off Active TRAC.
The slip indicator light should come
on.
Active TRAC will stop the control
of the engine. However, the brake
will remain to be controlled.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
■Turning off Active TRAC and VSC
Push and hold the button for more
than 3 seconds while the vehicle is
stopped to turn off Active TRAC
and VSC.
The slip indicator light will come on
and “VSC OFF” will be shown on
the multi-information display.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
268
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Active TRAC can be turned off when
The four-wheel drive control switch is in “H4” and the center differential is
unlocked.
■Automatic reactivation of Active TRAC and VSC
Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off after turning off the Active TRAC
and VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
■Automatic Active TRAC reactivation
If only the Active TRAC system is turned off, the Active TRAC system will turn on
when vehicle speed increases.
■Automatic Active TRAC and VSC reactivation
If the Active TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on
even when vehicle speed increases.
■If the brake system overheats
The Active TRAC and hill-start assist control will cease operation and a buzzer will
sound to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place (There is no problem with
continuing normal driving.)
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the Multi Terrain ABS, brake assist, Active
TRAC, VSC, hill-start assist control and VGRS
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-
ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the Multi Terrain ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the Multi Terrain ABS is acti-
vated.
269
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Hill-start assist control is operational when
●The shift lever is in “D” or “S”.
●The brake pedal is not depressed.
■VGRS is disabled in the following situations
●During stopping or the steering wheel has been moved for a long time while
driving at lower speeds.
●After the engine is restarted at less than -22°F (-30°C).
●If you disconnect the battery with the steering wheel turned, the center position
of the steering wheel could be slightly and temporary changed. To initialize the
VGRS, drive for a short while.
CAUTION
Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or
serious injury:
■The Multi Terrain ABS does not operate effectively when
●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on a wet or slick road.
■Stopping distance when the Multi Terrain ABS is operating on a wet or slick roads
The Multi Terrain ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance.
Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ-
ations.
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads
270
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Active TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the Active TRAC is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■If the hill-start assist control does not operate effectively
Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control may not
operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice.
■When Active TRAC and VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off Active
TRAC and VSC unless necessary.
■When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indica-
tor light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the specified tire pres-
sure level.
The Multi Terrain ABS and VSC will not function correctly if different tires are fitted
on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driv-
ing assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
271
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Pre-Collision System
: If equipped
When the radar sensor detects that a frontal collision is highly likely or
even unavoidable, safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are
automatically engaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as
vehicle damage.
■Pre-collision seat belts (front seats only)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the pre-
collision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses
control of the vehicle. (P. 94)
■Pre-collision brake assist
Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
■Pre-collision AVS
If the system determines that the collision is unavoidable, the operation of
AVS ( P. 255) helps prevent the vehicle front from going down when
hard brakes are applied.
272
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Radar sensor
Detects vehicles or other obsta-
cles on or near the road ahead and
determines whether a collision is
imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obsta-
cles.
When traveling on a road with very light traffic and very little to reflect the radar
waves emitted by the radar sensor, the system may decide that the radar sensor
is dirty, even if the sensor is not actually dirty. The system will automatically
restore itself when reflected radar waves are detected.
■Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occa-
sions when the radar sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcy-
cles, trees, or snowdrifts.
■The pre-collision system is operational when
●Seat belts (linked to the radar sensor)
• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Seat belts (linked to brake operation)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
273
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Brake assist
• Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
●AVS
• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
■Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of collision
●When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
●When driving over a narrow iron bridge
●When there is a metal object on the road surface
●When driving on an uneven road surface
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
●When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
●When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure
appears to be directly in the vehicle’s line of travel
●When climbing a steep hill causes an overhead billboard or other metallic struc-
ture to appear directly in the vehicle’s line of travel
●When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
●When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
●When passing through certain toll gates
When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possi-
bility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the restricted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.
■When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 649, 660)
274
2-4. Using other driving systems
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR005
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
275
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
●Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding
area.
●Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille.
■Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
276
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
2-5. Driving information
Off-road precautions
Off-road vehicle feature
●Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of
vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a signifi-
cantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
●An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road allowing you to anticipate problems.
●It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passen-
ger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at
excessive speeds may cause rollover.
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher
ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its
center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of
off-road applications.
277
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Off-road vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
●In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten
their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
●Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle roll-
over causing death or serious injury.
●Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle
gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or
abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover
due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
●Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of
gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger
car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
●Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down
is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways
much more easily than forward or backward.
278
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Off-road driving
When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precau-
tions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of
areas to off-road vehicles.
●Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted
to travel.
●Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering pri-
vate property.
●Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs
that restrict travel.
●Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving tech-
niques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to
roads.
■Additional information for off-road driving
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult
the following organizations.
●State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
●State Motor Vehicle Bureau
●Recreational Vehicle Clubs
●U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
279
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
●Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in
dangerous places.
●Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could
jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your
thumbs on the outside of the rim.
●Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand,
mud, water or snow.
●After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no
grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody.
Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these
materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.
●When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds,
jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehi-
cle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive dam-
age to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
280
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■To prevent the water damage
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or
other components does not occur.
●Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
●Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality,
locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately dam-
age.
●Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature
failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reduc-
ing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
■When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive slowly and
avoid deep water.
■Inspection after off-road driving
●Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may
affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.
●Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that
has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled mainte-
nance information, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.
281
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever
possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
●Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-
ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
●For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
■Roof luggage carrier (if equipped)
Roof rails
Cross rails
282
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Adjusting the position of cross rails
Turn the knobs counterclockwise
to release the cross rails.
Slide the cross rails to the appro-
priate position for loading luggage
and turn the knobs clockwise to
tighten the cross rails securely.
STEP 1
STEP 2
283
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 150) = 650
lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle. (P. 28 8 )
284
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding
in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 1230 lb. (560 kg), the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
1230 lb. — 366 lb. = 864 lb. (560 kg — 166 kg = 394 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb.
(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as fol-
lows:
864 lb. — 388 lb. = 476 lb. (394 kg — 176 kg = 218 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occu-
pants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the
number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (com-
bined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must
reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
285
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment.
●Receptacles containing gasoline
●Aerosol cans
■Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.
●Do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks.
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during
sudden braking, sudden swerving or in an accident.
●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the items may
get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being
depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers,
causing an accident.
•Driver’s feet
• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
•Instrument panel
•Dashboard
• Auxiliary box or tray that has no lid
●Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure some-
one during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for
passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious injury, in the
event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
286
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Weight of the load
●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
●Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause dete-
rioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
■Roof luggage carrier precautions
To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails with two or
more genuine Lexus cross rails or their equivalent.
When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:
●Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear
axles.
●If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width.
(P. 694 )
●Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage car-
rier.
●Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle
gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or
abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover
due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious injury.
●If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle
now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.
●Do not exceed 154 lb. (70 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.
287
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Cross rail adjustment
Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by pushing forward and rearward
them.
Failure to do so may cause an accident or serious injury in the event of emergency
braking or a collision.
NOTICE
■Cross rail adjustment
Do not remove the cross rail stoppers, or the moon roof may be damage when it is
tilted.
■When loading the luggage
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.
288
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Vehicle load limits
■Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 597)
CAUTION
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, TWR
(Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.
■Total load capacity: 1230 lb. (560 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
■Seating capacity: 8 occupants (Front 2, Rear 6)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do
not exceed the total load capacity.
■TWR (Trailer Weight Rating): 7000 lb. (3175 kg)
TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its
cargo weight) that you vehicle is able to tow.
■Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
289
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.
■Pre-winter preparations
●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tempera-
tures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
●Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of
battery electrolyte.
●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of
tire chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
290
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is fro-
zen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
●Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
●Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that
may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
■When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable
to road conditions.
■When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to “P” without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvert-
ent sliding or creeping.
291
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
(0.20 in. [5 mm] in diameter)
Cross chain
(0.25 in. [6.3 mm] in diameter)
Regulations on the use of tire chains
●Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
●Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
■Tire chains
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install the chains on the front tires.
●Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying man-
ual.
292
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
●Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
●Maintain the recommended level of tire inflation pressure.
●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
●Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
■Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used or
30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●Avoid sudden turns and braking.
●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
293
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legiti-
mate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when
tire chains are fitted.
294
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehi-
cle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance,
braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of
others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure
that you are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equip-
ment has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ
the requisite driving habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer
stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch
systems (if equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accor-
dance with your trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.
Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing
a trailer for commercial purposes.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information about additional
requirements such as towing kits, etc.
295
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Towing related terms
■GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
combination weight. The gross
combination weight is the sum of
the total vehicle weight (including
the occupants, cargo and any
optional equipment installed on
the vehicle) and the weight of the
trailer being towed (including the
cargo in the trailer).
■GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
vehicle weight. The gross vehicle
weight is the total weight of the
vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is
the sum of the vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment
installed on the vehicle) and the
tongue weight.
296
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross axle
weight. The gross axle weight is the
load placed on each axle (front
and rear).
■TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
trailer weight. The gross trailer
weight is the sum of the trailer
weight and the weight of the cargo
in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming base
vehicle with one driver, one front
passenger, towing package (if
available), hitch and hitch systems
(if required).
Additional optional equipment,
passengers and cargo in the vehi-
cle will reduce the trailer weight
rating so as not to exceed GCWR,
GVWR and GAWR.
Front GAWR
Rear GAWR
(With brakes)
298
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Weight limits
●The gross trailer weight must never exceed 7000 lb. (3175 kg).
●The gross combination weight must never exceed 13400 lb. (6078
kg).
●The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the GVWR indi-
cated on the Certification Label.
●The gross axle weight on each
axle must never exceed the
GAWR indicated on the Certifi-
cation Label.
●If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service
brakes are required.
●If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control
device with sufficient capacity is required.
●If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distrib-
uting hitch with sufficient capacity is required.
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehi-
cle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the limits.
■GCWR*
13400 lb. (6078 kg)
■TWR*
7000 lb. (3175 kg)
■Unbraked TWR*
1000 lb. (454 kg)
*: This model meets the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International
per SAE J2807.
299
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Trailer Tongue Weight
●A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types of
trailers or towing as described below.
●To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be
loaded by referring to the following instructions.
• Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue
weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue weight/Gross trailer weight 100 =
9% to 11%)
Gross trailer weight
Tongue weight
If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front axle
to the same weight as before the trailer connection.
If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the front
fender height above the front axle before connection. Adjust weight
distributing hitch torque until front fender is returned to the same
height as before connection.
The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be
measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station,
building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
300
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Lexus recom-
mends the use of Lexus hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, con-
tact your Lexus dealer.
●If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Lexus dealer.
●Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement
of your vehicle.
●Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
●Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.
●Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After
removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to pre-
vent entry of any substances into the vehicle.
Removing hitch cover
Remove the clip.
Grasp the lower edge of the hitch
cover and raise the cover.
When reattaching the cover,
reverse the steps listed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
301
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Selecting trailer ball
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross
trailer weight rating of the trailer.
Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer cou-
pler. Most couplers are stamped
with the required trailer ball size.
Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of
the lock washer and nut by at least
2 threads.
Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diam-
eter size.
Trailer class Typical trailer ball
size
IV
2 5/16 in.
II and III
2 in.
I
1 7/8 in.
302
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball
Hitch receiver pin hole position:
45.3 in. (1151 mm)
Connecting trailer lights
Use the wire harness stored in the
rear end under the vehicle body.
303
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Connecting and disconnecting a trailer
Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:
●Connecting a trailer
Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the “LO” (low) mode.
Turn off the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the 4-Wheel
AHC.
Connect a trailer.
Turn on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the 4-Wheel
AHC.
Select the “N” (normal) mode with the height select switch.
When a vehicle loaded with four occupants tows a trailer of about
4000 lb. (1800 kg) with more than about 400 lb. (180 kg) tongue
load, the normal mode may not be selected. However, there is no prob-
lem to continue normal driving. Drive with sufficient care because of
large load.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
304
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Disconnecting a trailer
Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the “LO” (low) mode. (Make sure the
vehicle height is in the “LO” mode by pulling the switch to “” on
the height select switch.)
Turn off the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the 4-Wheel
AHC.
Set the supporting leg of a trailer on the ground and raise the
hitch by 4 in. (100 mm).
Turn on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the 4-Wheel
AHC.
Wait for about 20 seconds until the rear vehicle height is lowered
by the automatic leveling function.
Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If not, raise the hitch higher
and repeat steps 2 through 5.
Move the vehicle forward in the “LO” mode where the hitch does
not touch anything in the “N” (normal) mode.
Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the “N” mode.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
STEP 8
305
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an
accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:
●Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not
exceed the posted towing speed limit.
●Lexus recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph (104
km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted
towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your
trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing
vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as speed increases.
Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.
●Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-trailer
connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
●Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an
area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination.
●Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip
the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to
move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the
trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a
trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone
guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.
●As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-
vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
●Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknif-
ing and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery
surfaces.
306
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
●Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making a
turn.
●Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a
wider than normal turning radius.
●Slow down before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery sur-
faces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.
●Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your
trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
●To maintain engine braking efficiency, when using engine braking, do
not put the transmission in “D”.
Transmission shift range position must be in “5” in the “S” mode.
●Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long
downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not
make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill
grades.
●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes
too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
●Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a
long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull
your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. (P. 6 88)
307
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so
only after performing the following:
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and
trailer’s wheels.
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.
●When restarting after parking on a slope:
With the transmission in “P”, start the engine. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal pressed.
Shift into “D” or “R” (if reversing).
Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or
back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
Have someone retrieve the blocks.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
308
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height
■Before towing
Check that the following conditions are met:
●Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (P. 70 2 )
●Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommenda-
tion.
●All trailer lights work as required by law.
●All lights work each time you connect them.
●The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
●The vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not
drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue weight, overload-
ing, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
●The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
●The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local
regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing pur-
poses.
No matter which class of tow hitch applies,
for a more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball
setup must be the proper height for the cou-
pler on the trailer.
Coupler
Trailer ball
309
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■AVS (adaptive variable suspension system)
The suspension can be switched for improvement in driveability. (P. 255)
■Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components (such as
an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Lexus recommends that you
do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start tow-
ing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less
than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.
■Maintenance
●If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to
the additional load. (See “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Services Guide”,
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.)
●Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately
600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
■If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely
affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.
●If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and
trailer should stabilize.
310
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●After the trailer swaying has stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred is
beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the towing
vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.
CAUTION
■Trailer towing precautions
●To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with
the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause
an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking per-
formance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the
hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer.
●Set the vehicle height to the “LO” mode and turn off the 4-Wheel AHC when you
connect a trailer to prevent the vehicle height from automatically changing.
311
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■To avoid accident or injury
●Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.
●If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device with
sufficient capacity is required.
●If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing hitch
with sufficient capacity is required.
●Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as
close to the trailer axle as possible.
●Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed
limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest.
Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery
surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instabil-
ity from reducing a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehi-
cle speed under the speed of which you experience the instability.
●Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.
●Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and
loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
●Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle
weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.
●Do not use cruise control when towing.
●Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do
not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.
●Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long down hills. Before descend-
ing steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden
downshifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the
brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could
cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.
312
2-5. Driving information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch
manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a
higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the par-
ticular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for
the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch man-
ufacturer can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.
■When towing a trailer
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and
state/provincial regulations.
●If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required.
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and
state/provincial regulations.
●Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s brak-
ing effectiveness.
●Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the
trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is
danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
NOTICE
■When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install the trailer
hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
■Do not directly splice trailer lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your
vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.
313
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Dinghy towing
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
314
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen............................ 316
Setting the touch screen ..... 322
3-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front air conditioning
system..................................... 334
Rear air conditioning
system..................................... 345
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers....... 349
Windshield wiper
de-icer.................................... 350
3-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type................... 351
Using the radio........................ 356
Using the CD/DVD
player ...................................... 366
Playing an audio CD ............. 369
Playing MP3 and
WMA discs............................ 373
Playing DVD video/audio
(with DVD player) ............... 377
Playing a video CD
(with DVD player) ................ 391
CD/DVD player and DVD
video disc information........ 394
Listening to Bluetooth®
audio....................................... 404
Listening to a
USB memory/iPod............... 412
Optimal use of the
audio/video system............. 422
Using the AUX port .............. 424
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ...................... 425
Interior features 3
Interior features 3
315
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-4. Using the rear seat
entertainment system
Rear seat entertainment
system features.................... 429
Using the radio........................ 437
Using the DVD player.......... 438
Playing an audio
CD/CD text.......................... 439
Playing WMA/MP3
discs......................................... 440
Playing DVD video/audio..... 441
Playing a video CD................. 451
DVD player and DVD
video disc information ....... 455
Using the video mode........... 457
Changing other settings ...... 459
3-5. Using the hands-free system
(for cellular phone)
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) .............. 461
Using a Bluetooth®
phone ...................................... 467
Setting the hands-free system
(for cellular phone) .............. 481
3-6. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list...................... 510
• Interior lights ............................... 511
• Personal lights .......................... 512
• Luggage compartment
light................................................ 513
3-7. Using the storage features
List of storage features.......... 514
• Glove box .................................. 515
• Console box.............................. 516
• Overhead console .................. 517
• Cup holders .............................. 518
• Bottle holders ........................... 519
• Auxiliary boxes ....................... 520
3-8. Other interior features
Cool box................................... 522
Sun visors ................................. 524
Vanity mirrors ......................... 525
Ashtrays.................................... 526
Cigarette lighters.................. 527
Power outlets .......................... 528
Heated steering wheel ........ 530
Climate control
seats/seat heaters............... 532
Armrest .................................... 535
Floor mats ................................ 536
Luggage compartment
features.................................. 538
Garage door opener ............ 540
Safety Connect ...................... 546
316
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen
By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the audio system
and air conditioning system, and adjust the screen display etc.
Press or to display the following screen.
■Display
“Setup” screen
317
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
“Information” screen
■Reference
Display buttons
Button Page
“CLIMATE” P. 33 4
“A U D I O ” P. 351
“MAP VOICE”/”DEST” Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“INFO PHONE” (Displaying the
“Information” screen) P. 31 6
“DISP” (Adjusting the display) P. 32 0
“SETUP” (Displaying the “Setup”
screen) P. 322
318
3-1. Using the touch screen
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
“Setup” screen
“Information” screen
Switch Page
“General” P. 3 2 2
“Clock” P. 3 26/
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Voice” P. 3 26/
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Navi.” Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Phone” P. 48 1
“A u d i o ” P. 327
“Vehicle” P. 332 /
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Other” Navigation System Owner’s Manual
Switch Page
“Phone” P. 461
“Map Data”, “Calendar”, “LEXUS
Insider”, “XM Sports”, “XM Stocks”,
“XM NavWeather”
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
319
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Initial screen
If the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode, the ini-
tial screen will be displayed for a
few seconds as the system starts
up.
Subscribers will be shown the
“LEXUS ENFORM” screen next.
320
3-1. Using the touch screen
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Adjusting the display
Press .
Adjust the display as desired using “-”/“+”/“R”/“G”.
If you do not touch the screen for 20 seconds, the system will return to
the previous screen.
*: Vehicles with DVD player only, displays during DVD video/audio or video
CD playback
STEP 1
STEP 2
“R” “G”
“Color”*Red Green
“-” “+”
“Tone”*Lighter Darker
“Contrast” Lower Higher
“Brightness” Darker Brighter
321
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■To avoid damaging the touch screen
●Touch the screen lightly with your finger. If there is no response, remove your fin-
ger from the screen and try again.
●Remove any dirt on the screen by wiping with a soft cloth. Do not use detergent.
■When using the touch screen
●If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be
operating slightly slower than normal.
●The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses.
Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display” screen or
remove your sunglasses.
■Changing between day mode and night mode
■To turn off the display
If “Screen Off” is touched, the screen display is turned off, and guidance is by voice
only.
■Opening or closing the rear display (if equipped)
Touching “Rear” opens or closes the rear display.
When the headlights are turned on, the
screen dims.
However, the screen can be switched to day
mode by touching “Day Mode”.
The screen will stay in day mode when the
headlights are turned on until “Day Mode”
is touched again.
The switch will not be displayed if the
instrument panel light control is set to the
brightest level.
322
3-1. Using the touch screen
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Setting the touch screen
General settings
This screen is used for language selection, and for setting operation
sounds and automatic screen change to on or off, etc.
Touch “General” on the “Setup” screen.
Page 1
Select language
Rear seat entertainment system
lock on/off (if equipped)
Beep on/off
Automatic transition on/off
Select keyboard layout
Save settings
Make sure to save after changing
settings.
Page 2
Select the unit
Delete personal data
You can change the touch screen to your desired settings.
323
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Select language
Select the desired language.
■Rear seat entertainment system on/off
The operation lock on the rear seat entertainment system can be
turned on or off.
■Automatic transition on/off
After 20 seconds of air conditioning or audio system use, the system
will return the display to the previous screen.
324
3-1. Using the touch screen
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Select keyboard layout
The keyboard layout can be changed.
“ABC” type
“QWERTY” type
■Select the unit
The measurement unit shown on the display can be changed.
325
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Delete personal data
Touch “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.
Touch “Delete”.
Check carefully beforehand, as
data cannot be retrieved once
deleted.
A confirmation screen will be displayed. Touch “Yes”.
The following personal data can be deleted or turned to their default settings:
• Radio preset stations
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Voice tag data
•Bluetooth
® phone data
•Volume setting
• Details setting
• Maintenance conditions
• Maintenance information “off” setting
• Address book
•Areas to avoid
•Previous points
• Route guidance
• Route trace
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
326
3-1. Using the touch screen
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Clock settings
Touch “Clock” on the “Setup” screen.
Select time zone
Daylight saving time on/off
Auto adjust clock on/off
Voice settings
Touch “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
Page 1
Select voice guidance volume
Voice guidance on/off during
route guidance
Voice guidance on/off during
audio system is in use
Voice recognition talkback on/
off
Restore default settings
■Manual adjustment
The minutes and hours can be adjusted manually when auto adjust clock is set to off.
327
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Page 2
Automatic recognition on/off
without pressing the talk switch
more than once
Voice guidance on/off when
using the traffic information
Voice guidance on/off when
using the XM® NavWeather
Select voice guidance projec-
tion
Audio settings
Touch “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.
Sound settings
Select portable player
Setting up Bluetooth® audio
■Sound settings
Touch “Sound Settings”.
Sound/DSP settings can be changed. (P. 422)
328
3-1. Using the touch screen
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Select portable player
Touch “Select Portable Player”.
A portable player can be selected
for connection.
Where no player is registered,
“Empty” is displayed.
When “Portable Player Info” is touched, the following screen is displayed:
“Device Name” and “Connection
Method” can be changed.
●Changing the device name
Touch “Edit”.
Enter the desired name.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
329
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Changing the connection method
Touch “From Vehicle” or “From
Portable Player”.
“From Vehicle”: Connect the audio
system to the audio player.
“From Portable Player”: Connect
the audio player to the audio sys-
tem.
■Setting up Bluetooth® audio
Touch “Bluetooth* Audio Settings”.
Register/remove Bluetooth®
audio
Automatic connection on/off
Display passcode
Display device name
Restore default settings
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
330
3-1. Using the touch screen
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Registering Bluetooth® audio
Touch “Register”.
Enter the passcode into the porta-
ble player.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.
●Removing Bluetooth® audio
Touch “Remove”.
Touch the player to remove.
A confirmation screen will be dis-
played, touch “Yes” to remove the
player.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
331
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Changing the passcode
Touch “Edit”.
Enter the desired passcode.
The passcode can be between 4 and 8 characters in length, and is set
to “0000” by default.
●Changing the device name
Touch “Edit”.
Enter the desired name
●Restoring the default settings
Touch “Default”.
A confirmation screen will be displayed, touch “Yes” to restore
the default settings.
■When setting the connection method to “From Portable Player”
●Connection methods differ depending on the audio player. Consult your audio
player’s manual.
●Automatic connection cannot be set to “On”.
■When using Bluetooth® audio
A confirmation screen will be displayed if an attempt is made to remove a portable
player.
Touch “Yes” to disconnect and remove the player.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
332
3-1. Using the touch screen
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Vehicle settings
Touch “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Refer to “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
Changing customizable settings
Setting up intuitive parking
assist
●Changing customizable settings
Various functions can be custom-
ized.
Detailed information: P. 718
333
3-1. Using the touch screen
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Setting up intuitive parking assist
Alert volume setting
Display on/off
Alert distance setting
Touch “Rear” to change the dis-
tance for the sensors display and
tone indication.
■Intuitive parking assist display
When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor system is in use, the
warning indicator will appear in the top right of the screen even if the display setting
has been set to “Off”.
334
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front air conditioning system
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the tempera-
ture setting.
Press to display the air conditioning operation screen.
*: The front air conditioning system cannot be switched off while the cool
box is on. (P. 522)
Automatic mode
Driver’s side temperature display
Fan speed
display
Off *
Air conditioning operation
screen display button
Passenger’s side temperature display
Micro dust and pollen filter
Driver’s side
temperature control
Air conditioning on/off switch
Outside air or recirculated
air mode
Windshield defogger
Passenger’s side
temperature control
Rear air conditioning operation
screen display switch
Airflow display
Outside
temperature
display
4-zone operation switch
Rear air conditioning operation mode
335
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the voice command system
Press or to operate
the voice command system.
(“Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”)
Without dynamic radar cruise
control
With dynamic radar cruise con-
trol
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
“AUTO” will be displayed on the touch screen.
Press to switch to automatic air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between
outside air and recirculated air modes.
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease
the temperature.
The temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s seats can be set
separately.
A
B
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
336
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Adjusting the settings
■Adjusting the temperature setting
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the
temperature.
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simulta-
neous modes each time “4-ZONE” is touched.
Individual mode (the indicator on “4-ZONE” is on.): The temperature
for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (P. 346) can be
adjusted separately. Operating the passenger’s side temperature con-
trol will enter individual mode.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on “4-ZONE” is off.): Only
or (driver’s side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all
seats.
■Adjusting the fan speed
Touch any switch of “LO” to “HI” (decrease increase) on the opera-
tion screen.
Press to turn the fan off.
337
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Changing the air outlets
Touch any mode on the operation
screen.
L: Left-hand front seat
R: Right-hand front seat
Different air outlets for the left-
hand and right-hand front seats can
be chosen.
Air flows to the upper body.
*1: Depending on the rear air con-
ditioning setting.
*2: Only in the automatic mode
Air flows to the upper body and-
feet.
*1: Depending on the rear air con-
ditioning setting.
Air flows to the feet.
*1: Depending on the rear air con-
ditioning setting.
338
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Air flows to the feet and the wind-
shield defogger operates.
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between (recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO”
and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the
button is pressed.
When the air intake control system is switched to automatic mode, it oper-
ates automatically.
339
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Changing the rear seat settings from the front seat
■Adjusting the temperature setting
To u c h .
Tou c h (increase) or
(decrease) on the screen. Operat-
ing the switch will enter individual
mode.
L: Left-hand rear seat
R: Right-hand rear seat
The air conditioning system
switches between individual and
simultaneous modes each time “4-
ZONE” is touched.
■Adjusting the fan speed
Touch on the screen or press .
Touch any switch of “LO” to “HI” (decrease increase) on the
operation screen.
Touch “REAR OFF” on the screen or press to turn the fan off.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
340
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Defogging the windshield
Press .
The air conditioning system control
operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode.
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press .
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pol-
len is removed from the air and the
air flows to the upper part of the
body.
Usually the system will turn off
automatically after approximately
3 minutes.
To stop the operation, press
again.
341
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Rear center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent
342
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur:
●Immediately after is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or
cool air is ready to flow.
●Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to in
accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
■Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to (outside air) mode in situ-
ations where the windows need to be defogged.
■Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and auto-
matically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the air conditioning is off, and the fan is operating, turning the “AUTO” mode
on will activate the air conditioning system.
■When outside temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when “A/C” is touched.
■Micro dust and pollen filter
●In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is cold,
the following may occur.
• Outside air mode does not switch to recirculated air mode.
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
●In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .
343
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Air conditioning odors
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 7 18)
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differ-
ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is stopped.
344
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Outside temperature display
Outside temperature is displayed in the screen.
The displayed temperature ranges from -40F (-40C) up to 122F
(50C).
■The outside temperature is displayed when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■When “— —” or “E” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer
■Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
●When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
●When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
345
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Rear air conditioning system
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the tempera-
ture setting.
Left side temperature control
Automatic mode
Fan speed
Off
Left side temperature setting display
Fan speed display Airflow display
Right side temperature control
Right side temperature setting display
Changes the air outlets used
346
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Press on to increase the temperature and to decrease
the temperature.
The temperature for the right-hand and left-hand rear seats can be set
separately.
Adjusting the settings
■Adjusting the temperature setting
Press on to increase the temperature and to decrease the
temperature.
The temperature for the right-hand and left-hand rear seats can be set sep-
arately.
■Adjusting the fan speed
Press (increase) or (decrease) on .
The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)
Press to turn the fan off.
■Changing the air outlets
Press .
The air outlets switch each time the button is pressed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
347
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
348
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Rear center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Roof side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob fully to the back of
the vehicle to close the vent.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is stopped.
349
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
■The rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
On/off
The operation time changes
according to the ambient tem-
perature and vehicle speed.
Pressing the button again also
turns the defoggers off.
350
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Windshield wiper de-icer
■The windshield wiper de-icer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and
wiper blades.
Press .
On/off
The windshield wiper de-icer
will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
Touching the switch again also
turns the de-icer off.
STEP 1
STEP 2
351
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type
CD and (optional) DVD player with changer and AM/FM radio
Press and touch each tabs to display the audio operation screen.
Type A
352
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Type B
353
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Title Page
Using the radio P. 356
Using the CD/DVD player P. 366
Playing an audio CD P. 369
Playing MP3 and WMA discs P. 373
Playing DVD video/audio P. 37 7
Playing a video CD P. 39 1
CD/DVD player and DVD video disc information P. 394
Listening to Bluetooth® audio P. 4 0 4
Listening to a USB memory/iPod P. 412
Optimal use of the audio/video system P. 42 2
Using the AUX port P. 424
Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 425
354
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the voice command system
Press or to operate
the voice command system.
(“Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”)
Without dynamic radar cruise
control
With dynamic radar cruise con-
trol
A
B
■Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
CAUTION
■For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
●Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
●Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes by yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the
surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain
inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any
of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
355
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine off.
■To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.
356
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the radio
Type A
This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.
Audio control screen display button
Power Volume
Seeking the frequency Preset tuning
Adjusting the
frequency
AM•FM/SAT mode buttons
Preset stations
Scanning for
receivable
stations
Traffic
information
Setting the
sound
(P. 42 2)
357
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Type B
Power Volume
Seeking the frequency Preset tuning
Adjusting the
frequency
AM/FM mode buttons
358
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Search for desired stations by turning or pressing
or on .
Touch and hold one of the preset stations (1 - 6) until a beep is
heard.
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■Scanning the preset radio stations
Touch “SCAN” on the screen until “P.SCAN” appears.
Preset stations will be played for a few seconds each.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired station is reached.
■Scanning all radio stations within range
Touch “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen and all stations within range will be
played for a few seconds each.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired station is reached.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
359
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
RDS (Radio Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■Receiving RDS broadcasts
Touch “ Type” or “Type ” on the
screen.
The program type changes as follows each time the switch is touched.
●“ROCK”
●“MISC” (Miscellaneous)
●“INFORM” (Information)
●“EASYLIS” (Easy listening)
●“CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)
●“R & B” (Rhythm and Blues)
●“RELIGION”
●“ALERT” (Emergency messages)
When a program is set, “Type Seek” appears.
STEP 1
360
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Touch “Type Seek” on the screen.
The radio seeks or scans for stations by the relevant program type.
If no radio station of that type is found, “Nothing” appears on the screen.
■Displaying radio text messages
If “MSG” appears on the screen, a text message may be displayed.
While the vehicle is stopped, touch “MSG” to display the text message.
When you touch “Message Off”, the display returns.
■Traffic announcement
Touch “Traffic” on the screen.
“Traf. Seek” appears on the display,
and the radio will start seeking any
station broadcasting traffic pro-
gram information.
If no traffic program station is
found, “Nothing” appears on the
display.
STEP 2
361
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
Press or touch “SAT” tab
on the screen.
The display changes as follows
each time the switch is pressed.
SAT1 SAT2 SAT3
Turn to select a desired channel from all the catego-
ries or press or on to select a desired channel in the
current category.
■Presetting XM® Satellite Radio channels
Select the desired channel. Touch one of the preset stations (1 - 6) and
hold it until a beep is heard.
STEP 1
STEP 2
362
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Changing the channel category
Touch “ Type” or “Type ” on the screen.
■Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
●Scanning channels in the current category
Touch “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired channel is
reached.
●Scanning preset channels
Touch “SCAN” on the screen and hold it until a beep is
heard.
“P.SCAN” appears on the screen.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired channel is
reached.
■Displaying the title and artist name
Touch “Text” on the screen.
The screen will display up to 16
characters.
Touch the button once again to
return to the previous screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
363
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When the battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased.
■Reception sensitivity
●Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear quarter window. To maintain clear
radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects
to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear quarter window.
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts pro-
vide under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.
●XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A.-
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada-
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987.
●Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob-
lem. Select “CH000” using the dial, and the receiver’s 8-character
ID number will appear.
●Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompany-
ing Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
*: Terms and services provided by XM® Satellite Radio are subject to change with-
out notice.
364
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
ANTENNA
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether
the XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surround-
ing antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
UNAUTH
You have not subscribed to XM® Satellite Radio. The
radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact XM® Satellite Radio for subscription infor-
mation. When a contract is canceled, you can choose
“CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. If you want to lis-
ten to the premium channel, contact XM® Satellite
Radio.
NO SIGNAL
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stron-
ger signal.
LOADING The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
OFF AIR The channel you selected is not broadcasting any pro-
gramming. Select another channel.
365
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987.
■Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter-
ference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:
●Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.
●Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
●Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
---
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action
needed.
CH UNAVL
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previ-
ous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change auto-
matically, select another channel.
366
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the CD/DVD player
This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.
Disc selection
Disc slot
Disc eject
Playback
Disc load
Audio control screen display button
Power Volume
Disc changeTrack, file and chapter
selection/fast forward/rewind
File selection
Setting the
sound
(P. 42 2)
367
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Loading a disc
■Loading a single disc
Press .
When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a disc after the CD/DVD player door opens.
■Loading multiple discs
Press and hold until a beep is heard.
When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a disc after the CD/DVD player door opens.
After inserting a disc, wait until the indicator changes from flash-
ing amber to green, then insert the next disc after the CD/DVD
player door has opened.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have inserted all discs.
To cancel the operation, press the or or button.
Ejecting discs
■Ejecting a disc
To select the disc to be ejected, touch the desired disc on the
screen or press or on .
Press and remove the disc.
■Ejecting all discs
Press and hold until a beep is heard, and remove the discs.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
368
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Selecting a disc
■To select a disc to play
Touch “Change Discs” on the screen.
Touch the desired disc on the
screen or press or on .
STEP 1
STEP 2
■When loading a disc
If you do not insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.
■Vehicles with DVD player
This screen appears when the video screen is
first displayed after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode.
369
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Playing an audio CD
This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.
Disc change
Displays track listDisc selection
Search play
Disc load
Random play
Repeat play
Playback
Track selection
Audio control screen display button
Vol ume Disc slot
Power
Disc eject
Setting the
sound
(P. 422)
370
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Loading and ejecting discs
P. 367
Selecting, fast forwarding and scanning tracks
■Selecting a track
Press to move up and to move down using until the desired
track number appears on the screen.
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold or on .
■Selecting a track from the track list
Touch “Select” on the screen.
Touch the desired track number.
or : Moves the list in steps of 5
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■Scanning a disc
Touch “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.
The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired track is reached.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
371
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Selecting a disc
■Selecting a disc to play
P. 368
■Scanning loaded discs
Touch and hold “SCAN” on the screen until “D.SCAN” appears.
The first 10 seconds of the first track on each disc will be played.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired disc is reached.
Random playback
■Current disc
Touch “RAND” on the screen.
Songs are played in random order.
■All discs
Touch and hold “RAND” on the screen until “D.RAND” appears.
Tracks on all loaded discs are played in random order.
Repeating a track or a disc
■Repeating a track
Touch “RPT” on the screen.
■Repeating a disc
Touch “RPT” on the screen and hold until “D.RPT” appears.
STEP 1
STEP 2
372
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Touch “RAND”, “RPT” or “SCAN” on the screen once again.
■Displaying the title and artist name
If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the titles of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to
32 letters can be displayed.
■Error messages
P. 394
373
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.
Power Volume
Playback
Folder selection
Disc load
File selection
Disc change
Audio control screen display button
Displays folder list
Disc slot
Disc eject
File selection
Disc selection Setting the sound
(P. 42 2)
Search play
Random play
Repeat play
Displays file list
374
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 367
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 368
Selecting a folder
■Selecting a folder
Touch “Folder ” or “ ” on the screen to select the next/previous
folder.
■Selecting a folder from the folder list
Touch “Select” for Folder on the screen.
Touch the desired folder number.
or : Moves the list in steps of 5
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
Touch and hold “SCAN” on the screen until “FLD.SCAN” appears.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired folder is reached.
STEP 1
STEP 2
375
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Selecting and scanning files
■Selecting one file at a time
Turn or press or on to select the desired file.
■Selecting a file from the file list
Touch “Select” for File on the screen.
Touch the desired file number.
or : Moves the list in steps of 5
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■Selecting a desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Touch “SCAN” on the screen.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired file is reached.
STEP 1
STEP 2
376
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Random playback
■Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Touch “RAND” on the screen.
■Playing all the files on a disc in random order
Touch and hold “RAND” on the screen until “FLD.RAND” appears.
Repeat play
■Repeating a file
Touch “RPT” on the screen.
■Repeating all of the files in a folder
Touch and hold “RPT” on the screen until “FLD.RPT” appears.
■Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Touch “RAND”, “RPT” or “SCAN” on the screen once again.
■Error messages
P. 394
377
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Playing DVD video/audio (with DVD player)
For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the
vehicle is completely stopped with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode and the parking brake applied.
While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.
When a DVD video disc or DVD audio disc is inserted while driving, the
audio contents of the main feature will automatically be played. However,
some discs may not be played from the main story.
If appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation rel-
evant to that control is not permitted.
Disc selection
Disc slot
Disc eject
Playback
Disc load
Audio/video control screen display button
Power Volume
Disc change
Track and chapter selection/
fast forward/rewind
DVD operation
Setting the
sound
(P. 42 2)
Return to menu screen
378
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Control icon screen
DVD video mode
Menu screen appears
Setting screen appears
(P. 379)
Selecting a disc (P. 368)
Display menu control key
(P. 380)
Vehicle is completely
stopped and the parking
brake is applied, the video
screen returns
Rewind
Stop
Pause
Touch to play.
Fast forward
Setting the sound (P. 42 2)
DVD audio mode
379
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Loading, ejecting and selecting discs
P. 367
■DVD settings
Touch “Settings” on “DVD” screen, the following screen appears.
DVD video mode
Search by title/group number
Change audio language/
audio format
Change angle
Change initial setting
Display the predetermined
scene and start playing from
there
Change subtitle language
Change screen size
Video screen returns
Return to previous page
Select menu number
Go to next page
DVD audio mode
380
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Fast forwarding/rewinding a disc
Touch and hold or on the control icon screen or press and hold
or on until a beep is heard.
Slow playback
Touch and then touch on the control icon screen. Video is played
slowly while you are touching .
Using the DVD menu
Touch “Menu” or “Top Menu” on the control icon screen.
Touch if the menu control key does not appear on the menu
screen.
Enter the menu item using to
, and touch “Enter”.
When you touch the any point on
the screen, the controls will disap-
pear.
To display them again, touch the
any point on the screen.
: Returns to the previous
screen
Note that specific items or the operating method differs from one DVD to
another. Refer to the manual that comes with the DVD disc. (The above image is
an example.)
STEP 1
STEP 2
381
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Searching for a desired screen
■Searching by title (DVD video mode only)
Touch “Search” on the “Settings” screen.
Input the desired title number and then touch “OK”.
: Deletes the last input number
: Returns to the previous screen
■Searching by group (DVD audio mode)
Touch “Search” on the “Settings” screen.
Input the group number and then touch “OK”.
: Deletes the last input number
: Returns to the previous screen
■Playing a bonus group (DVD audio mode only, if the DVD has bonus
options)
Touch “Search” on the “Settings” screen.
Input the desired bonus group number and touch “OK”.
: Deletes the number
: Returns to the previous screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
382
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Searching by chapter/track
Press or on to select a chapter/track.
■Selecting a menu number (DVD audio mode only)
Touch “Select Number” on the “Settings” screen.
Input the desired track number and touch “OK”.
: Deletes the number
: Returns to the previous screen
Changing the subtitle language
Touch “Subtitle” on the “Settings” screen.
Each time you touch the “Change”,
the next available language is
selected.
“Hide”: Hides the subtitles
: Returns to the previous
screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
383
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Changing the audio language (DVD video only)
Touch “Audio” on the “Settings” screen.
Each time you touch the “Change”,
the next available language is
selected.
: Returns to the previous
screen
Changing the audio format (DVD audio only)
Touch “Audio” on the “Settings” screen.
Each time you touch the “Change”,
the next available audio format is
selected.
: Returns to the previous
screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
384
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Changing the angle (if the angle option is available)
Touch “Angle” on the “Settings” screen.
Each time you touch the “Change”,
the next available angle is selected.
: Returns to the previous
screen
Changing screen size
Touch “Wide” on the “Settings” screen.
Touch the desired display. After
setting, touch “Save”.
Displays a 3 : 4 screen, with
either side in black
Widens the 3 : 4 screen hori-
zontally to fill the screen
Widens the 3 : 4 screen verti-
cally and horizontally, in the
same ratio, to fill the screen
: Returns to the previous
screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
385
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Changing the page (DVD audio only)
Touch “Prev. Page” or “Next Page” on the “Settings” screen to change the
page.
Initial DVD setup
The initial settings can be changed.
■ Displaying “Setup Menu” screen
Touch “DVD Video Settings” or “DVD Audio Settings” on the
“Settings” screen.
Touch the setting to be changed.
Page 1
After you change the settings,
touch “Save”.
“Default”:Restores default settings
: Returns to the previous
screen
Page 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
386
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Setting audio language (DVD video only)
Touch “Audio Language”.
Select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, touch “Other” and input the
desired language code. (P. 3 8 8 )
■Setting subtitle language
Touch “Subtitle Language”.
Select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, touch “Other” and input the
desired language code. (P. 3 8 8 )
■Setting menu language
Touch “DVD Language”.
Select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, touch “Other” and input the
desired language code. (P. 3 8 8 )
■Setting angle mark
If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off.
Touch “Angle Mark”.
Select “On” or “Off”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
387
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Parental lock (DVD video only)
Touch “Parental Lock”.
Input the 4-digit personal code and then touch “OK”.
If you enter wrong numbers, touch to delete the numbers.
Select a parental level (1 - 8). (P. 397)
■Setting the auto start
Discs that are inserted while the vehicle is in motion will automatically
start playing.
Touch “Auto Start”.
Select “On” or “Off”.
Certain discs may not play if you set to “On”.
■Setting sound dynamic range (DVD video only)
The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can
be adjusted.
Touch “Sound Dynamic Range”.
Select the desired level.
■Entering a language code
If you touch “Other” on the “Select Audio Language” screen, “Select
Subtitle Language” screen or “Select DVD Language” screen, you can
select a language by entering the 4-digit language code if that lan-
guage is available.
Input the 4-digit language code and then touch “OK”.
: Deletes the last input digit
: Returns to the previous screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
388
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Language codes
Code Language Code Language Code Language
0514 English 0207 Bulgarian 0712 Galician
0618 French 0208 Bihari 0714 Guarani
0405 German 0209 Bislama 0721 Gujarati
0920 Italian 0214 Bengali 0801 Hausa
0519 Spanish 0215 Tibeta n 0809 Hindi
2608 Chinese 0218 Breton 0818 Croatian
1412 Dutch 0301 Catalan 0821 Hungarian
1620 Portuguese 0315 Corsican 0825 Armenian
1922 Swedish 0319 Czech 0901 Interlingua
1821 Russian 0325 Welsh 0905 Interlingue
1115 Korean 0401 Danish 0911 Inupiak
0512 Greek 0426 Bhutani 0914 Indonesian
0101 Afar 0515 Esperanto 0919 Icelandic
0102 Abkhazian 0520 Estonian 0923 Hebrew
0106 Afrikaans 0521 Basque 1001 Japanese
0113 Amharic 0601 Persian 1009 Yiddish
0118 Arabic 0609 Finnish 1023 Javanese
0119 Assamese 0610 Fiji 1101 Georgian
0125 Aymara 0615 Faroese 1111 Kazakh
0126 Azerbaijani 0625 Frisian 1112 Greenlandic
0201 Bashkir 0701 Irish 1113 Cambodian
0205 Byelorussian 0704 Scots-Gaelic 1114 Kannada
389
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Code Language Code Language Code Language
1119 Kashmiri 1415 Norwegian 1914 Shona
1121 Kurdish 1503 Occitan 1915 Somali
1125 Kirghiz 1513 (Afan)
Oromo 1917 Albanian
1201 Latin 1518 Oriya 1918 Serbian
1214 Lingala 1601 Panjabi 1919 Siswati
1215 Laothian 1612 Polish 1920 Sesotho
1220 Lithuanian 1619 Pashto,
Pushto 1921 Sundanese
1222 Latvian 1721 Quechua 1923 Swahili
1307 Malagasy 1813 Rhaeto-
Romance 2001 Ta m i l
1309 Maori 1814 Kirundi 2005 Te l u g u
1311 Macedonian 1815 Romanian 2007 Tajik
1312 Malayalam 1823 Kinyarwanda 2008 Thai
1314 Mongolian 1901 Sanskrit 2009 Tig r inya
1315 Moldavian 1904 Sindhi 2011 Tu r k m e n
1318 Marathi 1907 Sangho 2012 Ta g a l o g
1319 Malay 1908 Serbo-
Croatian 2014 Setswana
1320 Maltese 1909 Sinhalese 2015 To n g a
1325 Burmese 1911 Slovak 2018 Tu r k i s h
1401 Nauru 1912 Slovenian 2019 Ts o n g a
1405 Nepali 1913 Samoan 2020 Ta t a r
390
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Code Language Code Language Code Language
2023 Tw i 2209 Vietnamese 2515 Yo r u b a
2111 Ukrainian 2215 Vola p ü k 2621 Zulu
2118 Urdu 2315 Wolof
2126 Uzbek 2408 Xhosa
■When a rear passenger selects set up menu
Follow the directions on the warning screen that is displayed.
Under the same condition, the rear passenger can cancel the set up operation from
the front seat.
■Rear system lock
P. 32 3
■Error messages
If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check if the region code printed on the DVD
matches the player’s region code.
If a different message is displayed: P. 394
391
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Playing a video CD (with DVD player)
For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the
vehicle is completely stopped with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode and the parking brake applied.
While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.
Setting the
sound
(P. 42 2)
Disc slot
Disc eject
Disc load
Video control screen display button
Power Volume
Disc change
Track selection/
fast forward/rewind Playback
Disc selection
Video CD
operation
392
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Loading, ejecting and selecting discs
P. 367
Fast forwarding/rewinding a video CD
Touch and hold or on the control icon screen or press and hold
or on until a beep is heard.
Slow playback
Touch and then touch on the control icon screen. Video is played
slowly while you are touching .
■Settings screen
Touch “Settings” on the “Video CD” screen, the following screen
appears.
Change sound multiplex
Return to previous page
Search by track number
(P. 381)
Display the predetermined
scene and start playing from
there.
Change screen size
Go to next page
If appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation rel-
evant to that control is not permitted.
393
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the video CD menu
Touch “Return” on the “Settings” screen.
Refer to the manual that comes with the video CD for specific menu items.
Changing the sound-multiplex mode
Touch “Main/Sub” on the “Settings” screen. The mode cycles through
each time the switch is touched.
“Main/Sub” “Main” “Sub”
Changing the page
Disc menu displaying
Touch “Prev. Page” or “Next Page” to change the previous/next page.
While playing the video
Touch “Prev. Page” or “Next Page” to change the previous/next track.
Selecting a desired screen
P. 381
■Error messages
P. 394
394
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CD/DVD player and DVD video disc information
■Error messages
Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the
problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
Message Cause Correction
Procedures
No CD
or
No disc
There is no disc in the CD
or DVD changer. Insert a disc.
Check CD X
or
Check disc X
• The disc X is dirty or
damaged.
• The disc X is inserted
upside down.
• The disc X is not play-
able with the player.
• Clean the disc.
• Insert the disc correctly.
• Confirm the disc is play-
able with the player.
CD error
or
DVD error
• There is a malfunction
within the system.
• Operation is stopped
due to a high tempera-
ture inside the player.
• Eject the disc.
• Eject the disc and allow
the player to cool down.
NO MUSIC FILE
This indicates that no
playable data is included
in the disc.
Eject the disc.
395
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■DVD video discs
●The DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats.
●Region code: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating
the region in which you can use the DVD video disc. If the DVD
video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this
DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc
on this player, “Region Code Error” appears on the screen. Even if
the DVD video disc does not have a region code, you may not be
able to use it.
●The DVD player supports multi-channel sound is output.
■Symbols shown on DVD video discs
Symbol Meaning
Indicates NTSC format
Indicates the number of audio tracks
Indicates the number of language subtitles
Indicates the number of angles
Indicates the screen display ratios available
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates the disc’s region code
ALL: in all countries
Number: region code
396
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
With CD player
With DVD player
Discs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■CD/DVD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■If discs are left inside the CD/DVD player or in the ejected position for extended
periods
Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD/DVD player.
■DVD video disc information
●DVD video discs
A DVD video disc is a Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs
have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression
technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored.
Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the
picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted.
Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher quality
of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help
you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.
397
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Viewer restrictions
This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions
of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc.
Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or
replaced with other scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.
Level 2-7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.
●Multi-angle option
You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.
●Multi-language option
You can select the subtitle and audio languages.
●Region codes
The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD
video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot
play the disc on the DVD player. (P. 395)
●Audio
This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format
DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be played.
●Title and chapter
Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by
title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.
Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A title is comprised of one or more chapters.
398
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Sound
●Dolby Digital
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
●Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by
method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights
owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copy-
right protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation,
and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
●DTS
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
System, Inc.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued
& pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks & DTS Digital Sur-
round and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
■MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
399
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
●Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.
●Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used:
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed
correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
400
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
401
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depend-
ing on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and
the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result.
In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be pos-
sible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
CAUTION
■DVD video precaution
Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversa-
tions represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be star-
tled by louder sound effects or startled when you change to a different audio
source.
Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving
hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.
402
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■Discs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of discs, 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters or Dual Disc.
Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function.
●Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm)
●Low-quality or deformed discs
●Discs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
●Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off
403
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the
player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
●Do not apply oil to the player.
●Store discs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
●Do not insert more than one disc at a time.
404
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Listening to Bluetooth® audio
The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy music played on a por-
table player from the vehicle speaker via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of
playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does
not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Album selection
Random play
Repeat play
Audio control screen display button
Track selection/fast forward/rewind
VolumePower
Connection status
Play/pause
Setting the sound
(P. 42 2)
405
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Status display
You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on
the screen.
Connection status
Battery charge
Indicators Conditions
Connection status
Blue: Good
Yellow: Bad
: Not connected
Battery charge : Full
: Low
406
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Connecting Bluetooth® audio player
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, you need to enter your portable
player into the system. Once registered, you can enjoy your music on the
vehicle’s audio system. (P. 329)
For the operation procedure for the portable player, consult your player’s
accompanying instruction manual.
■When the connection method is set to “From Vehicle”
When auto connection is on
When the portable player is on standby for the connection, it will be
automatically connected whenever the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
When auto connection is off
Manually connect the portable player in accordance with the following
procedure.
Touch “Connect”.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.
407
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When the connection method is set to “From Portable Player”
Operate the portable player and connect it to the Bluetooth® audio
system.
Touch “Connect”.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.
Playing Bluetooth® audio
Touch or to play/pause.
Some titles may not be displayed
depending on the type of portable
player.
408
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Selecting a track/album
■Selecting a track
Press to move up and to move down using until the desired
track number appears on the screen.
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold or on .
■Selecting an album
Touch “Album ” or “ ” to select
the desired album.
Random playback
Touch “RAND” to play the tracks on the album in random order.
To cancel the random playback, touch again.
Repeating a track
Touch “RPT” to repeat a track.
To cancel the repeat playback, touch again.
409
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When using the Bluetooth® audio system
●In the following conditions, the system may not function.
• The portable player is turned off
• The portable player is not connected
• The portable player battery is low
●There may be a delay if phone connection is carried out during Bluetooth®
audio play.
●Depending on the type of portable player that is connected to the system, oper-
ation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.
■Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the instrument panel. If the portable player is behind the
seat or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects,
connection status may deteriorate.
■Battery charge/signal status
This display may not correspond exactly with the portable player, and this system
does not have a charging function.
■About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG. Inc.
410
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Compatible models
Portable players must correspond to the following specifications:
●Bluetooth® specification
Ver. 1.1 or hig her
(Recommended: Ver. 2.0+EDR or higher)
●Profile
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.3 or higher)
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of
portable player.
Please go to the website at http://www.lexus.com/ to find approved portable play-
ers for this system.
■Certification
P. 46 5
■Reconnecting the portable player
If the portable player is disconnected with a poor reception when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system
automatically reconnects the portable player.
If you have switched off the portable player yourself, follow the instructions below to
reconnect:
●Select the portable player again
●Enter the portable player
■When transferring ownership of your vehicle
Be sure to remove the registered portable player from the system.
411
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not use the portable player or connect the Bluetooth® system.
NOTICE
■When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may
become hot, causing damage to the portable player.
412
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Listening to a USB memory/iPod
Connecting a USB memory or iPod enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.
The above illustration shows an iPod screen.
Audio control screen display button
Track/file selection
VolumePower
Select play mode Displays track list
Setting the
sound
(P. 42 2)
Random play
Repeat play
Play/pause
413
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Connecting the USB memory/iPod
Open the cover and connect the
player.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory/iPod if it is not turned on.
Playing an iPod
■Play/pause
Touch or to play/pause.
■Selecting a play mode
Touch “Menu” on the “USB” screen.
Select the desired play mode.
STEP 1
STEP 2
414
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Selecting a folder (USB memory only)
■Selecting a folder
Touch “Folder ” or “ ” on the screen to select the next/previous
folder.
■Selecting a folder from the list
Touch “Select” for Folder on the screen.
Touch the desired folder number.
or : Moves the list in steps of 5
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
(USB memory only)
Touch and hold “SCAN” on the screen until “FLD.SCAN” appears.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired folder is reached.
Selecting a file/track
■Selecting one file/track at a time
Turn or press or on to select the desired file/
track.
STEP 1
STEP 2
415
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Selecting a file/track from the list
Touch “Select” for File/Track.
Touch the desired file/track num-
ber.
or : Moves the list in steps of 5
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder (USB mem-
ory only)
Touch “SCAN” on the screen.
Touch “SCAN” once again when the desired file is reached.
Random playback
■Playing files/tracks from a particular folder in random order
Touch “RAND” on the screen.
■Playing the all files/tracks in random order
Touch and hold “RAND” on the screen until “FLD.RAND” appears.
Repeat play
■Repeating a file/track
Touch “RPT” on the screen.
■Repeating a all of the files in a folder (USB memory only)
Touch and hold “RPT” on the screen until “FLD.RPT” appears.
STEP 1
STEP 2
416
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Canceling random and repeat playback
Touch “RAND” or “RPT” on the screen once again.
■About iPod
●Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
●iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■iPod functions
●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the
iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may
not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may
resolve some malfunctions.
■USB memory functions
Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may
resolve some malfunctions.
■iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod
from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your
iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.
417
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Error messages for iPod
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“EMPTY”: This indicates that an empty playlist is selected.
“UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade
your iPod software to the latest version.
■Error messages for USB memory
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB
memory.
■Compatible models for iPod
Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some models
listed above might be incompatible with this system.
iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.
iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
●Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
●Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
●Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
Model Generation Software version
iPod 5th generation Ver. 1.2.0 or h igher
iPod nano
1st generation Ver. 1.3.0 or h ighe r
2nd generation Ver. 1.1.2 or higher
3rd generation Ver. 1.0.0 or highe r
iPod touch 1st generation Ver. 1.1.0 or higher
iPod classic 1st generation Ver. 1 .0.0 or h igh er
418
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■USB memory
●Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.
●Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not
play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed cor-
rectly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 65025
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
●MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 for-
mat.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
419
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
420
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●MP3 and WMA playback
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the
USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we
recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files
or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first folder.
If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been
changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in which it
was last used.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA
files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speak-
ers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and
the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result.
In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
421
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not connect an iPod or USB memory or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the player or its terminal
●Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. The temperature inside of the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the player while it is con-
nected.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
422
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Optimal use of the audio/video system
Touch “Sound” to adjust the
sound settings.
“Sound” tab
Touch “-” or “+” to
adjust the treble, mid or
bass to a level between
-5 to 5.
Touch “Front” or “Rear” to
adjust the front/rear
audio balance to a level
between F7 and R7.
Touch “L” or “R” to adjust
the left/right audio bal-
ance to a level between
L7 and R7.
423
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■The sound quality level is adjusted individually
The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for the each audio mode separately.
■About Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle
speed, wind noise or other noise.
“DSP” tab
Surround on/off
Automatic Sound Levelizer
(ASL) on/off
424
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the AUX port
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjust-
ments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
Connect the portable audio
device.
Press or touch “AUX” tab on the screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
425
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Turns the power on, selects
audio source
Volume
Radio mode: Selects a radio
station
CD mode: Selects a track,
file (MP3 and
WMA) and disc
DVD mode*:Selects a track,
chapter and
disc
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects a track
and album
iPod mode: Selects a song
USB memory mode:
Selects a file
and folder
*: DVD player only
426
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Turning on the power
Press when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down for 1 second
or more.
Changing the audio source
Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time the switch is pressed. If a mode cannot be
used, it will be skipped.
FM (1, 2)SAT (1, 2, 3)CD/DVD playerBluetooth® audio
VTRAUXiPod/USB memoryAM
Adjusting the volume
Press to increase the volume and to decrease the volume.
Hold up the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
Press to select the radio mode.
Press or to select.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold or on the
switch until a beep is heard.
STEP 1
STEP 2
427
3-3. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Selecting a track/file or chapter
Press to select the CD/DVD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or
USB memory mode.
Press or to select.
Selecting a disc
Press to select the CD/DVD mode.
Press and hold or until a beep is heard to select.
Selecting an album
Press to select Bluetooth® audio mode.
Press and hold or until a beep is heard to select.
Selecting a folder
Press to select the CD (only when MP3/WMA disc is in
use) or USB memory mode.
Press and hold or until a beep is heard to select.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
428
3-3. Using the audio system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Canceling automatic selection of a radio station
Press the same switch.
CAUTION
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
429
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
Rear seat entertainment system features
: If equipped
The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to
enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio system.
Front audio system
Display
Rear seat entertainment system controller
Headphone volume control knobs and headphone jacks
A/V input port
Power outlet
430
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Rear seat entertainment system controller
To use the buttons under the cover,
slide the cover down.
Opening and closing the display
■Opening and closing the display
●Open
Press “ON”, “OPEN/CLOSE”,
“DVD”, “VIDEO”, “MAP”,
“SOURCE” or “ ”.
●Close
Press “OPEN/CLOSE” or “OFF”.
If the display is closed with an
image shown, the image will auto-
matically turn off. (The sound will
not be turned off.)
Opening and closing operations can
be performed from the front seat.
(P. 321)
431
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Tilting the display
The display angles change as fol-
lows each time “TILT” is pressed.
The display angle is memorized
and will be recalled when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode again.
■Caution screen
This screen appears when the dis-
play is opened for the first time
after the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been switched to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
432
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Headphone jacks
To listen to the rear audio, open the
cover and use headphones.
To use the headphones
Connect them to the jack.
To adjust the volume
Turn the knob clockwise to
increase the volume. Turn the
knob counterclockwise to
decrease the volume.
Changing the source
Press “SOURCE” to display the
audio source selection screen.
Select an audio source.
433
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Changing the speaker output
To play the rear audio over the
speakers in the vehicle, turn
“Speaker Output” on.
■The rear seat entertainment system can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■Jam protection function
The display will stop closing and return to its previous position if something gets in
the way of it closing.
■When appears on the screen
It indicates that the selected icon cannot be used at this time.
■Rear system lock
P. 32 2
434
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Before using the controller (for new vehicle owners)
■When the controller batteries are fully depleted
■Headphones
With some headphones generally available in the market, it may be difficult to catch
signals properly. Lexus recommends the use of Lexus genuine wireless head-
phones.
Wired headphones can also be used.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
An insulating sheet is set to prevent the bat-
teries from being depleted. Remove the insu-
lating sheet before using the remote control.
Remove the depleted batteries and install
new batteries.
435
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Volume
●Adjust the volume when you connect the headphones to the jack. Loud sounds
may have a significant impact on the human body.
●Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversa-
tions represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be
startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source.
Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind.
CAUTION
■When the rear seat entertainment system is not used
Keep the display closed.
In the event of an accident or sudden braking, an occupant may hit the opened dis-
play, resulting in injury.
■To prevent accidents and electric shock
Do not disassemble or modify the remote control.
■When the remote controller is not used
Stow the remote controller.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■Closing the display
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
■For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada
Laser products (P. 354)
436
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■Cleaning the display
Wipe the display with a dry soft cloth.
If the screen is wiped with a rough cloth, the surface of the screen may be
scratched.
■To prevent damage to the remote control
●Keep the remote control away from direct sunlight, high temperature and high
humidity.
●Do not drop or knock the remote control against hard objects.
●Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote control.
■DVD player
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything
other than a disc into the slot.
■Closing the display
Do not close the display using your hand. Doing so may result in a malfunction.
437
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the radio
Selecting a preset station
Press or on “CH DISC” until the desired station band appears on the
screen.
Tuning the station
Press or until the desired station appears on the screen.
Press or until a beep is heard and the stations will be searched
automatically one after another.
Select radio mode on the
source screen to display the
control screen.
438
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the DVD player
Selecting a disc
Press or on “CH DISC” until
the desired slot number appears
on the screen.
●Audio CD, CD text P. 439
●MP3/WMA disc P. 440
●DVD video/audio P. 441
●Video CD P. 451
Turning on DVD mode
Selecting a disc
439
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Playing an audio CD/CD text
■Selecting a track
Press or until the
desired track number appears
on the screen.
■Fast forwarding or rewinding a track
Press and hold or .
440
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Playing WMA/MP3 discs
■Selecting a file
Press or until the
desired file number appears on
the screen.
■Selecting a folder
Press or on “FOLDER” until the desired folder number appears
on the screen.
■Fast forwarding or rewinding a file
Press and hold or .
441
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Playing DVD video/audio
■Controller
Turning on the DVD mode
Turning on the title selection
screen
Rewinding a disc
Selecting a chapter/track
Turning on the control icon
screen
Stopping a disc
Turning on the menu screen
Fast forwarding a disc
Playing/pausing a disc
Selecting an icon
Inputting the selected icon
442
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Control icon screen
Press “OPTION” if no icons are shown while watching a DVD
video/audio, and the following screen appears.
DVD video mode
Hide the buttons
Setting screen appears
(P. 448)
Fast forward
Play/pause
Stop
Rewind
Menu screen appears
Change audio format
DVD audio mode
If appears on the screen when you select an icon, the operation
relevant to that control is not permitted.
443
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Settings screen
Select “Settings” on the control icon screen, the following screen
appears.
DVD video mode
Change initial setting
Search by menu number
Return to previous screen
Change angle
Change subtitle language
Change audio format
Go to next page
Return to previous page
Display the predetermined
scene and start playing from
there
Search by title/group number
DVD audio mode
444
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Turning on or off the control icons
Press “OPTION” to turn on the control icons.
Press “OPTION” once again or select “Hide Buttons” to turn off the con-
trol icon.
Turning on the title selection screen
Press “TOP MENU” or select “Top Menu” to turn on the title selection
screen. For the operation of the title selection screen, see the separate
manual for the DVD disc.
Turning on the menu screen (DVD video mode only)
Press “MENU” or select “Menu” to turn on the menu screen. For the
operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.
Fast forwarding/rewinding a disc
Perform either of the following:
●Select or by pressing and holding .
●Press and hold or .
Slow playback
Select and then select . Video is played slowly when you select
by pressing and holding .
445
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Returning to the previous screen
Select “Return” to return to the previous screen. For the operation of the
menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.
Searching for a desired screen
■Searching by title (DVD video mode)
Select “Search” on the control icon screen.
Input the desired title number and then select “OK”.
: Deletes the last input number
: Returns to the previous screen
■Searching by group (DVD audio mode)
Select “Search” on the control icon screen.
Input the group number and then select “OK”.
: Deletes the last input number
: Returns to the previous screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
446
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Playing a bonus group (DVD audio mode only, if the DVD has bonus
options)
Select “Search” on the control icon screen.
Input the desired bonus group number and select “OK”.
: Deletes the number
: Returns to the previous screen
■Searching by chapter/track
Press or to select a chapter/track.
■Selecting a menu number (DVD audio mode only)
Select “Select Number” on the control icon screen.
Input the desired menu number on the screen and select “OK”.
: Deletes the number
: Returns to the previous screen
Changing the subtitle language
Select “Subtitle” on the control icon screen.
Select “Subtitle”.
Each time you press , the next
available language is selected.
“Hide”: Hides the control icons
: Returns to the previous
screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
447
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Changing the audio language (DVD video only)
Select “Audio” on the control icon screen.
Select “Audio”.
Each time you press , the next
available language is selected.
: Returns to the previous
screen
Changing the audio format (DVD audio only)
Select “Audio” on the control icon screen.
Select “Audio”.
Each time you press , the next available audio format is selected.
:Returns to the previous screen
Changing the angle (If the angle option is available)
Select “Angle” on the control icon screen.
Select “Angle”.
Each time you press , the next available angle is selected.
:Returns to the previous screen
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
448
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Initial DVD setup
■ Displaying “Setup Menu” screen
Select “Setup” on the control icon screen.
Select the setting to be changed.
Page 1
After you change the settings,
select “OK”.
“Default”:Restores default settings
“Page 2”: Go to page 2
: Returns to the previous
screen
Page 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
449
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Setting audio language
Select “Audio Language” to select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired
language code. (P. 45 0 )
■Setting subtitle language
Select “Subtitle Language” to select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired
language code. (P. 45 0 )
■Setting menu language
Select “DVD Language” to select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired
language code. (P. 45 0 )
■Setting angle mark
If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off.
Select “Angle Mark” to select angle options on or off.
■Parental lock
Select “Parental Lock”.
Input the 4-digit password and then select “OK”.
If you enter wrong numbers, select to delete the numbers.
Select a parental level (1 - 8). (P. 397)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
450
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Setting sound dynamic range
The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can
be adjusted.
Select “Sound Dynamic Range” to select the desired level.
■Entering a language code
If you select “Other” on the “Select Audio Language” screen, “Select
Subtitle Language” screen or “DVD Language” screen, you can select
a language by entering the 4-digit language code if that language is
available.
Input the 4-digit language code and then select “OK”.
: Deletes the last input digit
: Returns to the previous screen
●Language codes
P. 388
■Error messages
If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check if the region code printed on the DVD
matches the player’s region code.
If a different message is displayed: P. 394
451
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Playing a video CD
■Controller
Rewinding a disc
Selecting a track
Turning on the control icon
screen
Stopping a disc
Fast forwarding a disc
Playing/pausing a disc
Selecting an icon
Inputting the selected icon
452
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Control icon screen
Press “OPTION” if no icons are shown while watching a video CD,
and the following screen appears.
Hide the buttons
Setting screen appears
Fast forward
Play/pause
Stop
Rewind
If appears on the screen when you select an icon, the operation
relevant to that control is not permitted.
■Settings screen
Select “Settings” on the control icon screen, and the following
screen appears.
Select menu number
Return to previous screen
Change sound multi-plex
Go to next page
Return to previous page
Display the predetermined
scene and start playing from
there
453
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Fast forwarding/rewinding the video CD
Perform either of the following:
●Select or by pressing and holding .
●Press and hold or .
Slow playback
Select and then select . Video is played slowly when you select
by pressing and holding .
Using the video CD menu
Select “Return”.
Refer to the manual that comes with the video CD for specific menu
items.
454
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Selecting a desired screen
■Selecting a menu number
Select “Select Number” on the control icon screen.
Input the desired menu number on the screen and select “OK”.
: Deletes the number
: Returns to the previous screen
■Searching manually
Select “Prev. Menu” or “Next Menu” on the screen, or press or
until the desired screen appears.
Changing the sound-multiplex mode
Select “Main/Sub” on the control icon screen. The mode cycles through
each time the is pressed.
“Main/Sub” “Main” “Sub”
STEP 1
STEP 2
455
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
DVD player and DVD video disc information
■Error messages
P. 394
■DVD video discs
P. 395
■Symbols shown on DVD video discs
P. 395
■Discs that can be used
P. 396
■DVD video disc information
P. 396
■Sound
P. 39 8
■MP3 and WMA files
P. 39 8
456
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■DVD video precaution
P. 40 1
NOTICE
■Discs and adapters that cannot be used
P. 40 2
■Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the
player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
●Do not apply oil to the player.
●Store discs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
457
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using the video mode
Using the port
Open the cover.
The A/V input port is composed of
3 input ports.
Yellow: Image input port
White: Left channel audio input
port
Red: Right channel audio input port
Press “VIDEO” to select the
video mode.
Before switching to the video
mode, connect the audio-video
equipment to the A/V input
port.
458
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Changing to PAL format
Press “DISPLAY”.
If the video does not appear, turn
“PAL VIDEO” on.
“PAL VIDEO” will be displayed
when PAL format equipment is
connected to the A/V input port.
■A/V input port
The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audio-video
equipment is connected to the A/V input port. For details, refer to the manufac-
turer’s instructions.
■Power outlet
The power outlet is used to connect the audio-video equipment. (P. 528 )
NOTICE
■When the A/V input port is not in use
Keep the A/V input port cover closed.
Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical failure or a
short circuit.
459
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Changing other settings
Setting the display mode
Pressing “SIZE” changes the dis-
play modes sequentially as follows:
NormalWide 1 Wide 2
Adjusting the screen
Press “DISPLAY”.
Select the brightness, contrast, tone
or color, and make adjustments.
Press “DISPLAY” or to input it.
“R” “G”
“Color” Red Green
“-” “+”
“Tone” Lighter Darker
“Contrast” Lower Higher
“Brightness” Darker Brighter
460
3-4. Using the rear seat entertainment system
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Automatic closing of the rear display
Press “DISPLAY”.
If “Auto Close” is on, the display will
automatically close when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to OFF.
The display will automatically open
when the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode.
Displaying the map screen
Press “MAP”.
The map screen will appear.
461
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth® mobile phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless
data system that allows a mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-
free system and outgoing/incoming calls.
The illustrations of the hands-free system screens shown here may slightly
vary depending on the type of the system.
■Telephone switch
Off hook switch
• Sending
• Receiving
• “Phone” screen display
On hook switch
• End call
■Microphone
You can use the microphone
when talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to
can be heard from the front
speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth®
phone in the system. (P. 468)
462
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Status display
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on
the “Phone” screen.
Connection status
Battery charge
Call area
Signal strength
Indicators Conditions
Connection status
Blue: Good
Yellow: Bad
: Not connected
Battery charge Full Empty
Call area “Rm”: Roaming area
“Hm”: Home area
Signal strength Excellent Poor
463
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When using the hands-free system
●The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.
●If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
●If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
●Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
●In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• If a window is open
• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• If the air conditioning is set to high
• There is an effect from the network of the cellular phone
■Conditions under which the system will not operate
●If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth®
●If the mobile phone is switched off
●If you are outside service range
●If the mobile phone is not connected
●If the mobile phone’s battery is low
■Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the display. If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the
console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may dete-
riorate.
■Battery charge/Signal status
This display may not correspond exactly with the mobile phone itself.
464
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When using Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same time
The following problems may occur.
●The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.
●Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback.
■About the phonebook in this system
The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
●Phonebook data
●Voi c e tag
●All of call history
●Speed dial
When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.
■When you release your car
Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 3 2 5 )
■About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
465
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Compatible models
This system supports the following service.
●Bluetooth® Specification Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.0+EDR or
higher)
●Profiles
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or
higher)
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0
If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone, and take OPP or PBAP service individually.
Please go to “http://www.lexus.com/” to find approved Bluetooth® phones for this
system.
■Certification for the hands-free system
FCC ID: AJDK021
IC: 775E-K021
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device. This Category II radiocom-
munication device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-310.
466
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation expo-
sure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio fre-
quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the
IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in.
(20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
■Caution while driving
Do not use the mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® system.
NOTICE
■When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your mobile phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may
become hot, causing damage to the phone.
467
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using a Bluetooth® phone
Device name
Bluetooth® connection status
Help icon
Character deletion
Make a call
To display the screen shown above, press , and touch “Phone” on
the “Information” screen.
468
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Registering a Bluetooth® phone
You can register up to 4 phones in the system.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 467 )
Touch “Yes”.
Input the passcode displayed on
the screen into your phone.
For the operation of the phone, see
the manual that comes with your
cellular phone.
If you want to cancel it, select
“Cancel”.
If a completion message is
displayed, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
469
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Bluetooth® phone connection
There are two connection methods available — automatic and manual.
Automatic
When you register your phone,
auto connection will be activated.
Always set it to this mode and
leave the Bluetooth® phone on the
place where connection can be
established.
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode, the system will search for a
nearby cellular phone you have
registered. Next, the system auto-
matically connects with the most
recent of the phones connected to
in the past. Then, the connection
result is displayed.
470
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Manual
When the auto connection has failed or “Handsfree Power” is turned off,
you must connect Bluetooth® manually.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 467 )
Touch “Connect Phone”.
Touch “Handsfree Power”, or
touch the phone to connect.
The “Connect Bluetooth*” screen
is displayed.
If a completion message is dis-
played, connection is complete.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trade-
mark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
471
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Making a call
Once the Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the
following procedure:
■Dialing
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 467)
Input the phone number.
To delete the inputted phone num-
ber, touch .
To dial the last inputted phone
number, touch “Redial”.
Touch or press on the steering wheel.
■Reconnecting to the Bluetooth® phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system will automat-
ically attempt to reconnect.
If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, it
must be connected manually, or the phone must be re-selected or re-entered.
■Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing
●Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
●It may take time to connect.
■Help icon
When “?” is displayed on the screen, an explanation of the function can be dis-
played.
To display the explanation of the function, touch “?” and choose the desired func-
tion.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
472
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Dialing from the phonebook
You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your
mobile phone. The system has one phonebook for each telephone. Up
to 1000 entries may be stored in each phonebook. (P. 48 8)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 467 )
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data to call
from the list.
If the phonebook is empty, a mes-
sage will be displayed.
If you want to transfer new contacts
from a cellular phone, touch “Yes”.
Choose the number and then
touch or press on the
steering wheel.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
473
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Calling using speed dial
You can make a call using numbers registered from the phonebook.
(P. 488)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 467)
Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Select the desired tab and choose
the desired number to make a call.
■Dialing from history
You can call using the call history which has the 4 functions below.
“All”: all the numbers below which were memorized
“Missed”: calls which you missed
“Incoming”: calls which you received
“Outgoing”: numbers which you called
You can call using the 5 most recently called numbers shown by “All”
while driving.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 467)
Touch “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Select the desired tab and choose
the desired data from the list.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
474
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Touch or press on the
steering wheel.
■Calling using voice recognition
Using voice recognition, you can call by name, call by number, and
select a phone.
Ta l k sw i t c h
Without dynamic radar cruise
control
With dynamic radar cruise con-
trol
The “Calling by Name” operating procedure is explained here. Other
operating procedures are also similar.
STEP 4
A
B
475
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Calling by name
You can call by giving a voice tag registered in the phonebook.
(P. 502)
When you select “English” in “Language”, you can call by giving a name
registered in the phonebook.
Press or .
If you want to check the entire
command list, say “Command list”
to display the “Command List”
screen.
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say
“Phone.”
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say
“Dial by Name.”
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say the
desired name.
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say the
type of number such as “Mobile” or “Home”.
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say
“Dial”. (You can also call by pushing on the steering wheel
or selecting “Dial”.)
■Calling using POI
You can make a call using a Point Of Interest.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
476
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Call history list
●If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phone
book, the name is displayed in the call history.
●If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is dis-
played in the call history.
●Calls where the number is unavailable, such as public telephones, are not stored
in the call history.
■When driving
The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phonebook”, and “Dialing from history”
(except for call using the 5 most recently called numbers shown by “All” tab) are
unavailable.
■International calls
You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile phone in
use.
■Calling by using the call history
Push on the steering wheel to display the “Phone” screen.
Push on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen.
Push on the steering wheel to select the most recent number in the
history.
Select or push on the steering wheel.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
477
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a
sound.
Touch or press on the
steering wheel.
■To refuse a call
Touch or press on the steering wheel.
■To cancel voice recognition
●Press and hold or .
●Press on the steering wheel.
●Touch “Cancel”. (excluding command verification)
●Say “Cancel”.
■When using voice recognition
Use correct commands and speak clearly, otherwise the system may not correctly
recognize the command. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to
recognize the desired command.
478
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■To adjust the incoming call volume
Touch “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches.
Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
■To adjust the incoming call volume
Touch “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches.
■To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Touch “Mute”.
■International calls
Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the
mobile phone in use.
479
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Inputting tones
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phonebook.
To u c h “ 0-9 ”.
Input the number.
If repeated tone symbols* are
stored in the phonebook, “Send”
and “Exit” are displayed on the
right side of the screen.
*: Repeated tone symbols are sym-
bols or numbers displayed as p
or w, that come after the phone
number.
(e.g. 056133w0123p#1✽)
Confirm the number displayed on the screen, and touch “Send”.
If you touch “Exit”, this function will end.
■To transfer a call
Touch “Call Transfer”.
■To hang up
Touch or press on the steering wheel.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
480
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Interrupt call
When a connected call is interrupted by the third party, the incoming
call message will be displayed.
●To talk with the other party: Touch or press on the steer-
ing wheel.
●To refuse the call: Touch or press on the steering wheel.
Everytime you touch or press on the steering wheel after a
call is interrupted, you will be switched to the other party.
If your cellular phone is not accepted in HFP Ver. 1.5, this function can-
not be used.
■Transferring calls
●It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to a mobile phone while driving.
●If you transfer from a mobile phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be
displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.
●Transfer method and operation may vary according to the mobile phone used.
●For operation of the mobile phone in use, see the phone’s manual.
■While driving
Key input is unavailable.
■Voice recognition during a call
“Mute” and “Send Tones” can be operated by voice recognition. (P. 474 )
■Interrupt call operation
Interrupt call operation may differ from depending on your phone company and the
cellular phone.
481
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Setting the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
You can set the hands-free system to your desired settings.
Setting the volume
Managing the phone
Phonebook settings
Bluetooth® settings
Detailed settings
To display the screen shown above, press , and touch “Phone” on
the “Setup” screen.
482
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Setting the volume
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 4 81)
Touch “Volume” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Choose the volume setting switch.
“Voice Volume”: changes the
speaker volume
“Ring Volume”: changes the ring
volume
Touch “-” or “+” to lower or raise
the volume, and then “OK”.
When you complete all settings, touch “Save”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
■Adaptive volume control
When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the system automatically raises the
volume one level.
If the vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h), the volume will return to its original
level.
■To return to the default volume settings
Touch “Default”, and then “Yes”.
STEP 5
483
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Managing the phone
■Registering a Bluetooth® phone
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 4 81)
Touch “Manage Phone” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Touch “(add new)” to register your
cellular phone to the system.
Input the passcode displayed on
the screen into your phone.
For the operation of the phone, see
the manual that comes with your
cellular phone.
If you want to cancel it, select
“Cancel”.
If a completion message is dis-
played, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
484
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Selecting a Bluetooth® phone
If multiple Bluetooth® phones are registered, follow the procedure
below to select the Bluetooth® phone to be used. You may only use
one phone at a time.
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 4 81)
Touch “Manage Phone” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Select the phone to be used.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connect the phone.
If a completion message is dis-
played, connection is complete.
■Editing a Bluetooth®phone
You can see the information of the Bluetooth® phone on the system or
edit.
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 4 81)
Touch “Manage Phone” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Connect Phone” screen.
Touch “Edit Phones”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
485
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Select a phone to edit.
Touch “Edit”.
Input the device name, and touch
“OK”.
Confirm the device name, and touch “OK”.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
STEP 8
486
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Removing a Bluetooth®phone
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 4 81)
Touch “Manage Phone” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Connect Phone” screen.
Touch “Remove Phones” on the “Phones” screen.
Select the desired phone. If you
want to remove all phones, touch
“Select All”.
Touch “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If
everything is correct, touch “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
■Registering a Bluetooth® phone in a different way
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 481)
Touch “Manage Phone” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Connect Phone” screen.
Touch “New Phone” on the “Phones” screen.
Touch “(empty)” on the “Phone Position” screen.
Follow the steps for “Registering a Bluetooth® phone” from “STEP4”.
(P. 48 3 )
STEP 6
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
487
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When another Bluetooth® device is connected while registering or selecting a
phone
When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation message will be dis-
played. If you want to disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
■When Bluetooth® audio is connected while registering a phone
When you register your phone, Bluetooth® audio will disconnect. It will reconnect
automatically when you finish registration. It will not be reconnected depending on
the phone you are using.
■Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing
Bluetooth® audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when you finish
registration. It will not be reconnected depending on the phone you are using.
■Setting the “Handsfree Power”
Changes between “On” and “Off” every time you select “Handsfree Power” on the
“Connect Phone” screen. When “Handsfree Power” is “On”, the Bluetooth® phone
is automatically connected when you turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■Editing the “Device Name”
If you change a device name, the name registered in your cellular phone is not
changed.
■About “Device Address”
This address is specific to the system and cannot be changed. If you have registered
two Bluetooth® phones with the same device name and you cannot distinguish one
from the other, refer to this address.
■When you delete a Bluetooth® phone
The phonebook data will be deleted at the same time.
■Connecting the phone by voice recognition
“Connect Phone” includes “Select Phone”, “Add New Phone” and “Handsfree
Power Off (On)” can be operated by voice recognition. (P. 474 )
488
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Phonebook settings
The phonebook manages a maximum of 4 phonebooks in total. The data
for 1000 contacts (up to 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in
each phonebook.
Setting the phonebook
Speed dials setting
Deleting the call history
Setting the voice tag
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 4 81)
Touch “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
489
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Setting the phonebook
●Transferring a phone number
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to the
system.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 4 8 8)
Touch “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “Transfer Contacts”.
Select “Replace Contacts” or “Add
Contacts”.
In the case that the phonebook
contains phonebook data, this
screen will be displayed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
490
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Transfer the phonebook data to
the system using the Bluetooth®
phone.
If you wish to cancel the transfer
before it finishes, touch “Cancel”.
If the transferring is interrupted
midway through the process, the
phonebook data transferred until
then can be memorized in the sys-
tem.
In the case that you have selected “Add Contacts”, a message will
be displayed.
If you want to transfer another phonebook, touch “Yes”.
●Registering the phonebook data
You can register the phonebook data. Up to 3 numbers per person
can be registered.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 4 8 8)
Touch “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “New Contact” on the “Contacts” screen.
Input the name, and touch “OK”.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
491
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Input the phone number, and
touch “OK”.
If you want to use the tone signal
after the phone number, input the
tone signal too.
Touch the desired phone type.
When two or less numbers in total are registered to this contact,
this screen is displayed. When you want to add a number to this
contact, select “Yes”.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
492
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Editing the phonebook data
You can register the phone number separately.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 4 8 8)
Touch “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “Edit Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
Choose the data to edit.
Choose “Edit” for the desired
name or number.
Edit the name or number. After editing, touch “Save”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
493
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Deleting the phonebook data
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 4 8 8)
Touch “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “Delete Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, touch “Select
All”.
Touch “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If
everything is correct, touch “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
■Phonebook data
Phonebook data is managed for every registered phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
■Setting the phonebook in a different way (To display the “Contacts” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 67)
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
Touch “Manage Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
494
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When transferring a phone number
Transfer the phone number while engine is running.
■When you have selected “Replace Contacts” to transfer the phone number
●If your cellular phone does not support PBAP or OPP service, you cannot use
this function.
●If your phone supports PBAP service, you can transfer the phonebook data
without operating your phone.
●If your phone does not support PBAP service, you must transfer the phonebook
data by operating your phone.
■When you have selected “Add Contacts” to transfer the phone number
If your cellular phone does not support OPP service, you can not use this function.
You can transfer the phonebook data only by operating your phone.
■When another Bluetooth® device is connected during transferring a phonebook
When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation message will be dis-
played.
If you want to disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
■Transferring the phone number while Bluetooth® audio is playing
Bluetooth® audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when data transfer
finishes. (It will not be reconnected depending on the phone you are using.)
■Editing the phonebook data in a different way (From “Contact Data” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 67)
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch “Options” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Touch “Edit Contact” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data” from “STEP5”. (P. 492)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
495
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Editing the phonebook data in a different way (From “Call History” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 67)
Touch “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch “Add Contact” or “Update Contact”.
If you touch “Add Contact”, follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data”
from “STEP5”. (P. 492)
If you touch “Update Contact”, follow the steps “Editing the phonebook
data” from “STEP4”. (P. 492 )
■Deleting the phonebook data in a different way
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 67)
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch “Options” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Touch “Delete Contact” on the “Contact Data” screen.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch
“Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
496
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Speed dials setting
●Registering the speed dial
You can register the desired phone number from phonebook. Up to 18
numbers per phone can be registered.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 4 8 8)
Touch “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Touch “New Speed Dial”.
Choose the data to register.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
497
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Touch the desired phone number.
Touch the switch you want to regis-
ter the number in.
If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation mes-
sage will be displayed. If you want to replace it, touch “Yes”.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
498
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Editing the speed dial
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 4 8 8)
Touch “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Touch “Edit Speed Dials” on the “Speed Dials” screen.
Choose the data to edit.
Touch “Edit”.
Edit the name. After editing, touch “OK” and then “Save”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
499
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
●Deleting the speed dial
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 4 8 8)
Touch “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Touch “Delete Speed Dials” on the “Speed Dials” screen.
Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, touch “Select
All”.
Touch “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If
everything is correct, touch “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
500
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Setting the speed dials in a different way (To display the “Speed Dials” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 67)
Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Speed Dial” screen.
■Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Speed Dial” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 67)
Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Touch “(add new)” on the “Speed Dial” screen.
Touch “Yes” to set new speed dial.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch the desired phone number.
Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial” from “STEP6”. (P. 496 )
■Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Contact Data” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 67)
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch “Options” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Touch “Set Speed Dial” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Touch the desired phone number.
Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial” from “STEP6”. (P. 496 )
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
501
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Deleting call history
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 4 8 8)
Touch “Delete Call History” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Choose the desired history to
delete.
Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, touch “Select
All”.
Touch “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If
everything is correct, touch “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
502
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Setting the voice tag
●Registering the voice tag
You can register a voice tag. Up to 20 numbers can be registered.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 488)
Touch “Manage Voice Tags” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “New Voice Tag”.
Choose the data to register.
■Deleting call history in a different way
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 4 67)
Touch “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Touch “Delete” on the “Call History” screen.
Follow the steps “Deleting call history” from “STEP4”. (P. 5 0 1)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
503
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tou c h “ - REC”, and record a
voice tag.
To play the voice tag, touch
“ Play”.
When you complete the voice tag registration, touch “OK”.
●Editing the voice tag
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 488)
Touch “Manage Voice Tags” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “Edit Voice Tags” on the “Voice Tags” screen.
Choose the data to edit.
Edit the voice tag. After editing, touch “OK”.
●Deleting the voice tag
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 488)
Touch “Manage Voice Tags” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Touch “Delete Voice Tags” on the “Voice Tags” screen.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
504
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, touch “Select
All”.
Touch “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If
everything is correct, touch “Yes”.
STEP 4
■Setting the voice tag in a different way (To display the “Voice Tags” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 467 )
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Touch “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
Touch “Manage Voice Tags” on the “Contacts” screen.
■When using the voice tag
Do not change the language setting from the language setting used when register-
ing. If they are different, the voice recognition cannot recognize the voice tag that
you have registered.
■When recording a voice tag
Do so in a quiet environment.
■Registering the voice tag in a different way
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 467 )
Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Touch “Options” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Touch “Set Voice Tag” on the “Contact Data” screen.
Follow the steps “Registering the voice tag” from “STEP5”. (P. 502)
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
505
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Bluetooth settings
You can confirm and change the Bluetooth® settings.
Changing the handsfree power
Changing the name in the Bluetooth® network
Changing the passcode that you used to register your cellular phone
in the system
The address specific to the system
You cannot change it. If the same device name is displayed on the screen of
your phone, refer to it.
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 4 81)
Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
506
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Changing the handsfree power
The Bluetooth phone is automatically connected when you turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode. You can change this to “On” or “Off”.
Display the “Bluetooth* Information” screen. (P. 505)
Touch “Handsfree Power” on the “Bluetooth* Information”
screen.
Touch “On” or “Off”, and then
“Save”.
■Editing the device name
Display the “Bluetooth* Information” screen. (P. 505)
Touch “Edit” of “Device Name” on the “Bluetooth* Information”
screen.
Input the device name, and touch “OK”.
Touch “Save” on the “Bluetooth* Information” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
507
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Editing the passcode
Display the “Bluetooth* Information” screen. (P. 505)
Touch “Edit” of “Passcode” on the “Bluetooth* Information”
screen.
Input a passcode, and touch “OK”.
Touch “Save” on the “Bluetooth* Information” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
■While driving
You cannot change “Handsfree Power” from “On” to “Off” while driving.
■About “Device Name”
The device names are common Bluetooth audio and Bluetoothphone.
If you change the device name of the phone, the device name of the audio
will change at same time. However, passcodes can be set separately.
■To return to the default detailed phone settings
Touch “Default”, and then “Yes”.
If “Handsfree Power” is changed from “Off” to “On”, Bluetooth connection will
begin.
STEP 4
508
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Detailed settings
Changing the incoming call display mode
Changing the display phone status
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 4 8 1)
Touch “Details” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
509
3-5. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Changing the incoming call display mode
You can select the method of the incoming call display.
Display the “Detailed Phone Settings” screen. (P. 508)
Touch “Incoming Call Display Mode” on the “Detailed Phone
Settings” screen.
Touch “Full Screen” or “Drop
Down”, and touch “Save”.
“Full Screen”:
The hands-free screen is dis-
played when a call is received,
and you can operate the system
from that screen.
“Drop Down”:
A message is displayed at the
top of the screen, and you can
only operate the system with the
steering switches.
■Changing the display phone status
You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when
connecting.
Display the “Detailed Phone Settings” screen. (P. 508)
Touch “Display Phone Status” on the “Detailed Phone Settings”
screen.
Touch “On” or “Off”, and then “Save”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
■To return to the default detailed phone settings
Touch “Default”, and then “Yes”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
510
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-6. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Your Lexus is equipped with an illuminated entry system to assist in enter-
ing the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the
following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of
the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the
doors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode.
Front personal lights (P. 512)
Front interior lights (P. 511)
Rear personal lights ( P. 512 )
Rear interior light (P. 511)
Shift lever light (when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode)
Inside door handle light
Door courtesy light
512
3-6. Using the interior lights
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Personal lights
Front
On/off
Rear (with rear seat entertainment system)
On/off
Rear (without rear seat entertainment system)
On/off
Personal lights
513
3-6. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Luggage compartment light
Off
Door position
■To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the interior lights and “ENGINE START STOP” switch light remain on when the
door is not fully closed and the interior light switch is in the door position, the lights
will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 7 18)
Luggage compartment light
514
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-7. Using the storage features
List of storage features
CAUTION
■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with
other stored items.
●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored
items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.
Auxiliary boxes
Overhead console
Glove box
Bottle holders
Door pockets
Console box/cool box
Cup holders
515
3-7. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Glove box
Open (push button)
Unlock with the mechanical key
Lock with the mechanical key
■ Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
CAUTION
■While driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Glove box
516
3-7. Using the storage features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Console box (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with either a console box or cool box.
For vehicles with the cool box, refer to page 522.
Lift the lever to open.
Remove the tray.
STEP 1
STEP 2
CAUTION
■While driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Console box
517
3-7. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Overhead console
Press the button.
The overhead console is useful for
temporarily storing small items.
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not leave the overhead console open.
Items may fall out and cause injury.
Overhead console
518
3-7. Using the storage features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Cup holders
Front
Press down and release the lid.
You can adjust or remove the sepa-
rator inside.
Rear
Pull down the armrest.
Press the button.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Cup holders
519
3-7. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Bottle holders
For front seats
For second seats
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Bottle holders
520
3-7. Using the storage features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
For third seats
Auxiliary boxes
For front seats
Press and release the lid.
NOTICE
■Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle hold-
ers, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses
may break.
Bottle holders and auxiliary boxes
521
3-7. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
For second seats
Pull down the armrest.
Press the button to release the
lock.
For third seats
STEP 1
STEP 2
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving.
Items stored in it may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
Auxiliary boxes
522
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
3-8. Other interior features
Cool box
: If equipped
■While the cool box is on
The front air conditioning system cannot be turned off.
■When the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below
The cool box may not operate.
While the engine is running, the cool box, which is cooled by the air condi-
tioning, can be used.
Lift the lever to open.
On/off
When on, the indicator light
comes on.
If the front air conditioning sys-
tem is not in use, the front air
conditioning system is automati-
cally turned on when the cool
box is turned on.
STEP 1
STEP 2
523
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■While driving
Keep the cool box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the cool box on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.
524
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Sun visors
Main sun visor
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and swing
to the side.
Side extender:
Place in side position, then
slide backwards.
Sub-sun visor
Flip down with the main sun
visor in position or .
525
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
526
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Ashtrays
CAUTION
■When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■To prevent fire
●Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then
make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
●Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
Front
Push the front part of the lid to
open. Push the lid again to close.
To remove, pull the ashtray
upwards
Rear
Pull the ashtray lid to open.
Pull the ashtray upwards to
remove.
527
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Cigarette lighters
■The cigarette lighter can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■To avoid burns or fires
●Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
●Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
●Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
Push the front part of the lid to
open, and push the cigarette
lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when it is ready for use.
528
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for the following components:
12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A
115 V AC: Accessories that use less than 100 W
Front (12 V)
Rear (115 V AC)
529
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■The power outlet can be used when
12 V
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
115 V AC
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■To prevent the fuse from being blown
12 V
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
115 V AC
Do not use a 115 V AC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 115 V AC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection
circuit will cut the power supply
■To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
■Appliances that may not operate properly (115 V AC)
The following 115 V AC appliances may not operate properly even if their power
consumption is under 100 W:
●Appliances with high initial peak wattage
●Measuring devices that process precise data
●Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
530
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Heated steering wheel
: If equipped
■The heated steering wheel can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Timer
The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
■If the indicator light flashes
Press the switch to turn the heated steering wheel off and then press the switch
again. If the indicator light still flashes, a malfunction may be occurring. Turn the
heated steering wheel off and have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
The heated steering wheel can be used to heat the leather portion of the
steering wheel.
On/Off
The indicator light comes on
when the heater is operating.
531
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Burns
●Only appropriately qualified and capable non-impaired persons should operate
the vehicle. However, care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the fol-
lowing categories comes into contact with the steering wheel when the heated
steering wheel is on:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not use the heated steering wheel more than necessary. Doing so may cause
minor burns or overheating.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switch off when the engine is not running.
532
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Climate control seats/seat heaters
The temperature of the front seats can be adjusted individually.
■Climate control seats (if equipped)
Press the knob to release it,
and turn the knob to the
desired temperature setting.
Off
Press the knob to lock it when
not in use.
Ventilation
Cool air
Warm air
533
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Seat heaters
For front seats
Press the knob to turn the
system on.
Turn the knob to the desired
temperature setting.
The further you turn the knob
clockwise, the warmer the seat
temperature becomes.
Press the knob again to turn the
system off.
For second seats (if equipped)
For left second seat
For right second sea
High heating temperature
Low heating temperature
To turn on the seat heater, press
“HI” or “LO”.
The indicator light on “HI” or
“LO” switch indicates that the
seat heater is on.
Off
To turn off, press “OFF”.
534
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■The climate control seats/seat heaters can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Replacing the air filters (Climate control seats only)
Filters are installed in the climate control seats. For replacement of the filters, con-
tact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■Burns/excessive cooling (Climate control seats only)
●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the climate control
seats/seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the climate control seats/seat
heater. Using the climate control seats/seat heater with a blanket or cushion
increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.
●Do not use the climate control seat more than necessary. Doing so may cool the
occupants excessively or may cause minor burns or overheating (Climate control
seats only).
NOTICE
■To prevent climate control seats/seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects
(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
535
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Armrest
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
Front
Lift the lever up and slide the
armrest
Rear
Pull the armrest down for use.
536
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Floor mats
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the
pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become diffi-
cult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■When installing the driver’s floor mat
●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
●Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
Fix the floor mat in place using
the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
For details, refer to the floor mat
retention clip installation
instructions supplied with the
clips.
537
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Before driving
●Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in
the right place with all the provided retain-
ing hooks (clips). Be especially careful to
perform this check after cleaning the floor.
●With the engine stopped and the shift lever
in “P”, fully depress each pedal to the floor
to make sure it does not interfere with the
floor mat.
538
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Luggage compartment features
■Cargo hooks
Cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
■Cargo net hooks
To hang the cargo net, use the
cargo net hooks and rear cargo
hooks.
The cargo net itself is not
included as an original equip-
ment.
■Storage compartment (if equipped)
Open the storage compartment
as shown.
539
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■ When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in
use.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the cargo net hooks
Avoid hanging things other than a cargo net on it.
■Warning reflector holder
Hold the warning reflector with
a band.
The warning reflector itself is not
included as an original equip-
ment.
■First-aid kit holder
Hold the first-aid kit with a band.
The first-aid kit itself is not
included as an original equip-
ment.
540
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Garage door opener
The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink®.
Programming HomeLink® (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator
Buttons
■Programming HomeLink®
Point the remote control transmit-
ter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to
75 mm) from the HomeLink® but-
tons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator
light in view while programming.
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and
other devices.
STEP 1
541
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink® buttons and the trans-
mitter button. When the
HomeLink® indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink® indicator light
comes on but does not flash,
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds
and remains lit, the HomeLink®
button is already programmed.
Use the other buttons or follow
the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink® button” instruc-
tions. (P. 543 )
Test the HomeLink® operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button.
If a HomeLink® button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink® but-
ton. The remote control transmitter
is of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is of
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a roll-
ing code system”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
542
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Programming a rolling code system
If your device is rolling code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming HomeLink®” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
motor for the location of the learn button.
Press the learn button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.
Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink® button for
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink® signal and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the sur-
face of the HomeLink®.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in view while programming.
Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink® compatible trans-
ceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
543
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Test the operation of the HomeLink® by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates cor-
rectly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
■Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink® buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink® button” instructions.
Operating HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator
light should come on.
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a
signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink® button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink® indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still press-
ing and holding the HomeLink® button, press and hold the button on the
transmitter until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from a slow to a
rapid flash.
STEP 5
STEP 6
544
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside but-
tons for 10 seconds until the indi-
cator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.
■Before programming
●Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
●The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from
the HomeLink® button.
■Certification for the garage door opener
FCC ID: CB2070NHL4
IC: 279B-070NHL4
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Oper-
ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. The term “IC:”
before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
■When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
545
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■When programming a garage door or other remote control devices
The garage door on other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
546
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Safety Connect
: If equipped
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to pro-
vide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is sup-
ported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per
day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics
hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions,
as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is avail-
able at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such
then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
■System components
Microphone
LED light indicators
“SOS” button
547
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
●Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency ser-
vice providers. (P. 549)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
●Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 550)
●Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 550)
●Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 550)
■Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agree-
ment and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact
your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or
push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription
details.
548
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Safety Connect Services Information
●Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible dur-
ing Safety Connect.
●Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Con-
tact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center
or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription
Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available;
charges vary by subscription term selected.
●Safety Connect services will function in the United States, including Hawaii and
Alaska, and in Canada. The services will not function outside of the United
States in countries other than Canada. For details about the service, contact
your Lexus dealer.
●Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunica-
tions Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indi-
cate your language of choice when enrolling.
■When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
549
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off.
Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service
is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage con-
ditions:
●Green indicator light on = Active service
●Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
●Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
●No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the
system is designed to automatically call the response center. The
responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak
with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the
occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats
the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services
provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent
to the location.
550
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities
to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a
police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-
LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Con-
nect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehi-
cle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under cer-
tain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle.
Further information is available at Lexus.com.
■Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to
reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will
determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch
the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent
that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such
as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside
Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Con-
nect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com.
551
3-8. Other interior features
3
Interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio fre-
quency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless
phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards pre-
viously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
●ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
●NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measure-
ment) Report 86 [1986]
●ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Pro-
tection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evalua-
tions of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers,
and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and
industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the
ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
552
3-8. Other interior features
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■License
Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following
United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations:
4,901,307 5,490,165 5,056,109 5,504,773 5,101,501
5,506,865 5,109,390 5,511,073 5,228,054 5,535,239
5,267,261 5,544,196 5,267,262 5,568,483 5,337,338
5,600,754 5,414,796 5,657,420 5,416,797 5,659,569
5,710,784 5,778,338
■Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Maintenance and care 4
553
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ............ 554
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ............. 557
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements........................ 560
General maintenance.......... 562
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ............................... 565
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions........................... 566
Hood.......................................... 570
Engine compartment ............. 571
Tires............................................ 588
Tire inflation pressure............ 597
Wheels....................................... 601
Air conditioning filter ........... 603
Electronic key battery.......... 606
Checking and replacing
fuses ........................................ 608
Light bulbs................................ 625
554
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
■Automatic car washes
●Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
■High pressure car washes
●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the
windows.
●Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop-
erly.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condi-
tion.
●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
555
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Aluminum wheels
●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
●Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving
for long distance in the hot weather.
●Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled suffi-
ciently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
NOTICE
■To prevent deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum
wheels etc.)
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with
low humidity when storing the wheels.
556
4-1. Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■When using an automatic car wash
Turn off the wiper switch.
It the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers
may operate and the wiper blades may be
damaged.
557
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep
it in top condition:
■Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■Cleaning the leather areas
●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-
gent.
●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated area.
■Synthetic leather areas
●Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
●Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
558
4-1. Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to main-
tain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent
results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■Water in the vehicle
●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 125 )
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or serious injury.
■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
559
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
●Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte-
rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline
or acidic solutions, dye, or bleach.
• Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
●Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior
part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces.
●Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also
cause the body to rust.
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to
the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with
lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes
running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
560
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure perfor-
mance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular main-
tenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.
■General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself
or by a Lexus dealer.
■Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the mainte-
nance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, read the “Warranty
and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled
Maintenance”.
■Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s
Guide”, “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement”
or “Warranty Booklet”.
561
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
●Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all
systems on your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been
performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your
vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
CAUTION
■Warning in handling of battery, oils, fuels, and fluids
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after han-
dling. (P. 584 )
562
4-2. Maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
General maintenance
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery • Maintenance-free (P. 584)
Brake fluid • At the correct level? (P. 580)
Engine coolant • At the correct level? (P. 578 )
Engine oil • At the correct level? (P. 573 )
Exhaust system • No fumes or strange sounds?
Power steering fluid • At the correct level? (P. 582)
Radiator/condenser/hoses • Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 579)
Washer fluid • At the correct level? (P. 587 )
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Services Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you
notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified
service shop for advice.
563
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal • Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
“P”?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance
and correct amount of free play?
Brakes
• Pulls to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
Head restraints • Move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers • Function properly?
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
564
4-2. Maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system operate
smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats • Do the seat controls operate prop-
erly?
Steering wheel
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
Items Check points
Doors • Operate smoothly?
Engine hood • The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after parking?
Tire
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or dam-
aged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■If the engine is running
Turn off the engine and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
565
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the oper-
ation of the emission control system.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
●When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary mal-
function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driv-
ing trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
566
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct proce-
dures given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (P. 584)
•Warm water
• Baking soda
•Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P. 580)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
•Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
Engine coolant level (P. 578 )
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene gly-
col based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding cool-
ant)
567
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Items Parts and tools
Engine oil level P. 573 )
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel
(used only for adding oil)
Fuses (P. 60 8 ) • Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Power steering fluid (P. 5 82)
• Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRON®II or III
•Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding power
steering fluid)
Radiator and condenser
(P. 579)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 597 ) • Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 5 87)
• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
•Funnel
568
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move sud-
denly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury
observe the following precautions.
■When working on the engine compartment
●Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fans and engine drive belt.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv-
ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine
compartment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel
and battery fumes are flammable.
●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and
corrosive sulfuric acid.
■When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille
Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF.
With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric
cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the
coolant temperature is high. (P. 579)
■When working on or under the vehicle
●Do not get under the vehicle with just the jack supporting it.
Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.
●Use eye protection to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from get-
ting in your eyes.
569
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt
in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
570
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Hood
CAUTION
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Lift the hood catch and lift the
hood.
STEP 1
STEP 2
571
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Engine compartment
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 582)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 573)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 574 )
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 580)
Fuse box (P. 6 08)
Washer fluid tank (P. 587)
Battery (P. 584)
Cooling fans
Condenser (P. 579)
Radiator (P. 579 )
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 578)
572
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Engine compartment cover
■Removing the cover
Front
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
573
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Installing the clips
Push up center portion
Insert
Press
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait
more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull
the dipstick out.
STEP 1
STEP 2
574
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the
engine. (P. 697 )
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
575
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Remove the oil filler cap.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
Engine oil selection P. 697
Oil quantity
(LowFull) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Items Clean funnel
■Engine oil consumption
●The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of
the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
●More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds, frequent
acceleration and deceleration.
●A new engine consumes more oil.
●When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may
have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
●Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles (0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles, 1.0 L per 1000
km)
●If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 600 miles (1000 km),
contact your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
576
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Resetting the engine oil maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
Switch the display to the trip meter A when the engine is running.
(P. 18 4 )
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode (but do not start the engine
because otherwise the reset mode will be canceled). Continue to press
and hold the button until the multi-information display indicates that the
reset is complete.
CAUTION
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call
your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning
recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
577
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
578
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“F”
“L”
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
■If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water
pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer, test the cap and check for leaks in
the cooling system.
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])
Canada:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
579
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser, and clear any foreign objects.
If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing burns or other injuries.
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and you may be burned.
580
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Brake fluid
■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
MAX
MIN
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
■Adding fluid
■Refilling brake fluid
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Depress the brake pedal more than 40 times.
Remove the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake fluid up to the
“MAX” line.
If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may overflow.
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
581
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
582
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Power steering fluid
■Fluid level
The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.
Full (when cold)
Add fluid (when cold)
Full (when hot)
Add fluid (when hot)
Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 min-
utes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid tempera-
ture, 140F - 175F [60C - 80C]).
Cold: Engine has not been run for about five hours. (Room tempera-
ture, 50F - 85F [10C - 30C]).
■Checking the fluid level
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Clean all dirt off the reservoir.
Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinstall and remove the reservoir cap again.
Check the fluid level.
Fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III
Items Rag or paper, Clean funnel (only for adding fluid)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
583
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■When checking the reservoir
Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.
NOTICE
■When adding fluid
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.
■After replacing the reservoir cap
Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or dam-
age.
584
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Battery
■Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
■Checking battery condition (vehicles with the battery indicator)
Check the battery condition using the indicator color.
Blue: Good condition
White: Charging is necessary.
Have the battery checked by
your Lexus dealer.
Red: Not working properly,
have the battery checked by
your Lexus dealer.
585
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the
ground cable.
●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the battery.
■After recharging/reconnecting the battery
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
Depress the brake pedal with the shift lever in “P” or “N”.
Open and close any of the doors.
Restart the engine.
CAUTION
■Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydro-
gen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
●Keep children away from the battery.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
586
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medi-
cal attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical atten-
tion immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention imme-
diately.
NOTICE
■When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accesso-
ries are turned off.
587
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
CAUTION
■When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
588
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with tread wear.
■Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indi-
cators is shown by the “TWI” or
“ ” marks, etc., molded on the
sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
inflation pressure if not rotated.
■Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire
pressure warning system after
rotating the tires that the tire
pressure has been changed for
towing. (P. 5 89)
■The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire infla-
tion pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 652)
Front
589
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning
system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmit-
ter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 589, 590)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
●When the set tire pressure has been changed before towing with
the P285/50R20 tires. (P. 702 )
●When rotating the tires in above situation.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
590
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 70 2)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times and a message
appears on the multi-information
display.
Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and then
turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF.
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique
ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it
is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
591
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the
fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20
minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indi-
cate a system malfunction.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they
have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■If the tread wears down 0.16 in. (4 mm) or more on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
592
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replace-
ment tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either
the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
■Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction perfor-
mance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires
is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be ade-
quate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All sea-
son tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capac-
ity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 289 )
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
(P. 707)
593
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tire pressure warning system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to
the specified level.
■If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level
and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warn-
ing light does not flash 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the
multi-information display.
●After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
594
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Tire pressure warning system certification
FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
FCC ID: HYQ13BCX
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt
à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est suscepti-
ble de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
595
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Tire pressure warning system operation
The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a tire
bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs.
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous
handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
●Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
●Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
596
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters and tire valve caps
●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
●When replacing tires, make sure also to replace the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those speci-
fied. The cap may become stuck.
■To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushion-
ing ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
598
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended lev-
els, adjust tire pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leak-
age.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
599
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every 2 weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel efficiency
●Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures
that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
●Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the
tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is bal-
anced.
600
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leak-
age, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as
soon as possible.
601
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling
control.
■Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using:
●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened
■Aluminum wheel precautions
●Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
●Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
602
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in
the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 589 )
CAUTION
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-
genuine wheels.
603
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to main-
tain air conditioning efficiency.
■Removal method
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch IGNITION ON
mode and switch to recirculated air mode, then turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Open the glove box and
remove the filter cover.
Remove the filter case.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
604
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Cleaning method
If the filter is dirty, clean by blow-
ing compressed air through the
filter from the downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm)
from the filter and blow for
approximately 2 minutes at 72
psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or
bar).
If it is not available, have the filter
cleaned by your Lexus dealer.
■Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning fil-
ter and replace it with a new
one.
The “UP” marks shown on the
filter should be pointing up.
605
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Checking interval
Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or
early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, refer
to the “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Sched-
uled Maintenance”.)
■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the system
●When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.
●When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.
606
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■You will need the following items:
●Flathead screwdriver (To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip
of the screwdriver with rag.)
●Small Phillips-head screwdriver
●Lithium battery (CR1632)
■Replacing the battery
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
607
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
●The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
●The operational range is reduced.
■Use a CR1632 lithium battery
●Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your Lexus
dealer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
■When the card key battery needs to be replaced
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealer. Your Lexus dealer can
replace the battery for you.
CAUTION
■Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can
cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●Do not touch or move any other components inside the electronic key.
●Do not bend the battery terminals.
608
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
The fuses are located in the following places. To check the
fuses, follow the instructions below.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
STEP 1
STEP 2
609
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the bolts and the cover.
Remove the lid.
611
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A and B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appro-
priate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
STEP 5
Type A
Type B
612
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Type C and D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
Type C
Type D
613
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■Engine compartment
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1A/F 15 A Exhaust system
2HORN 10 A Horn
3EFI MAIN 25 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem, EFI NO.2, exhaust system
4IG2 MAIN 30 A INJ, IGN, MET
5RR A/C 50 A No circuit
6SEAT-A/C LH 25 A Seat heater and ventilators
7RR S/HTR 20 A Rear seat heater
8DEICER 20 A Windshield wiper de-icer
9CDS FAN 25 A Condenser fan
10 TOW TAIL 30 A Towing tail light system
614
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
11 RR P/SEAT 30 A Power second seat
12 ALT-CDS 10 A No circuit
13 FR FOG 15 A Front fog lights
14 SECURITY 5 A Security horn
15 SEAT-A/C RH 25 A Seat heater and ventilators
16 STOP 15 A
Stoplights, high mounted stoplight,
trailer brake system, towing converter,
ABS, VSC, main body ECU, EFI
17 TOW BRK 30 A Trailer brake system
18 RR AUTO A/C 50 A Rear air conditioning system
19 PTC-1 50 A PTC heater
20 PTC-2 50 A PTC heater
21 PTC-3 50 A PTC heater
22 RH-J/B 50 A Cowl side junction block RH
23 SUB BATT 40 A To w i n g
24 VGRS 40 A VGRS ECU
25 H-LP CLN 30 A Headlight cleaner
26 DEFOG 30 A Rear window defogger
27 AHC 60 A 4-Wheel AHC
28 HTR 50 A Front air conditioning system
29 PBD 30 A Power back door ECU
30 LH-J/B 150 A Cowl side junction block LH
Fuse Ampere Circuit
615
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
31 ALT 180 A Each fuse
32 A/PUMP NO.1 50 A Air injection driver
33 A/PUMP NO.2 50 A Air injection driver 2
34 MAIN 40 A
Headlight, daytime running light sys-
tem, HEAD LL, HEAD RL, HEAD LH,
HEAD RH
35 ABS1 50 A ABS
36 ABS2 30 A ABS
37 ST 30 A Starter system
38 IMB 7.5 A ID code box, smart access system
with push-button start
39 AM2 5 A Main body ECU
40 DOME2 7.5 A Vanity lights, overhead module, rear
interior light
41 ECU-B2 5 A
Driving position memory system,
power back door ECU, power third
seat
42 AMP 2 30 A Audio system
43 RSE 7.5 A Rear seat entertainment system
44 TOWING 30 A To w i ng c o n ve r t e r
45 DOOR NO.2 25 A Main body ECU
46 STR LOCK 20 A Steering lock system
47 TURN-HAZ 15 A
Gauges and meters, front turn signal
lights, rear turn signal lights, towing
converter
Fuse Ampere Circuit
616
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
48 EFI MAIN2 20 A Fuel pump
49 ETCS 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
50 ALT-S 5 A IC-ALT
51 AMP 1 30 A Audio system
52 RAD NO.1 10 A Audio system, navigation system,
parking assist system
53 ECU-B1 5 A
Smart access system with push-button
start, overhead module, yaw rate & G
sensor, tilt and telescopic steering,
gauges and meters, cool box, gateway
ECU, steering sensor, VGRS
54 DOME1 5 A
Illuminated entry system, power third
seat switch, power back door switch,
clock
55 HEAD LH 15 A Headlight high beam (left)
56 HEAD LL 15 A Headlight low beam (left)
57 INJ 10 A Injector, ignition system
58 MET 5 A Gauges and meters
59 IGN 10 A
Circuit open, SRS airbag system,
gateway ECU, occupant detection
ECU, smart access system with push-
button start, ABS, VSC, steering lock
system
60 HEAD RH 15 A Headlight high beam (right)
Fuse Ampere Circuit
617
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
61 HEAD RL 15 A Headlight low beams (right)
62 EFI NO.2 7.5 A Air injection system, air flow meter
63 RR A/C NO.2 7.5 A No circuit
64 DEF NO.2 5 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers
Fuse Ampere Circuit
618
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1CIG 15 A Cigarette lighter
2BK/UP LP 10 A Back-up lights, trailer
3ACC 7.5 A
Audio system, parking assist system,
multi-display assembly, gateway ECU,
main body ECU, mirror ECU, satellite
radio, smart access system with push-
button start
619
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
4PANEL 10 A
Ashtray, trailer brake system, ciga-
rette lighter, cool box, center differen-
tial lock, driving mode switches, multi-
information display, air conditioning
system, glove box light, audio system,
emergency flashers, headlight cleaner
switch, driving position memory
switches, outside rear view mirror
switches, overhead module, roll sens-
ing of curtain shield airbags off switch,
rear heater panel, shift lever switch,
power back door main switch, camera
switch, VSC OFF switch, steering
switch, console switch, instrument
panel light control
5ECU-IG No.2 10 A
Air conditioning system, rear heater
panel, overhead module, ABS, VSC,
steering sensor, yaw rate & G sensor,
main body ECU, stoplights, moon
roof, anti-glare inside rear view mirror
6WINCH 5 A No circuit
7A/C IG 10 A
Cool box, condenser fan, cooler com-
pressor, rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers, smog sensor
8TAIL 15 A
Tail lights, license plate lights, front fog
lights, parking lights, side marker
lights
Fuse Ampere Circuit
620
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
9WIPER 30 A Windshield wiper
10 WSH 20 A Windshield washer
11 RR WIPER 15 A Rear window wiper and washer
12 4WD 20 A Four-wheel drive system
13 LH-IG 5 A
Alternator, towing, seat heater and
ventilators, windshield wiper de-icer,
front seat belt, emergency flasher,
inverter switch, shift lever switch
14 ECU-IG No.1 5 A
ABS, VSC, tilt and telescopic steer-
ing, gateway ECU, shift lock system,
parking assist system, cruise control
switch, pre-collision system, headlight
cleaner, multi-display assembly, rain-
sensing windshield wiper, driving posi-
tion memory system, power door lock
system
15 S/ROOF 25 A Moon roof
16 RR DOOR RH 20 A Power windows
17 MIR 15 A Mirror ECU, outside rear view mirror
defoggers
18 RR DOOR LH 20 A Power windows
19 FR DOOR LH 20 A Power windows
20 FR DOOR RH 20 A Power windows
Fuse Ampere Circuit
621
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
21 RR FOG 7.5 A No circuit
22 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system
23 AM1 5 A No circuit
24 TI & TE 15 A Tilt and telescopic steering
25 FR P/SEAT RH 30 A Power seat
26 PWR OUTLET 15 A Power outlet
27 OBD 7.5 A On-Board diagnosis
28 PSB 30 A Pre-collision system
29 DOOR NO.1 25 A Main body ECU
30 FR P/SEAT LH 30 A Power seat
31 INVERTER 15 A Inverter
Fuse Ampere Circuit
622
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Passenger’s side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1RSF LH 30 A Third seat adjustment (left)
2B/DR CLSR RH 30 A Back door closer
3B/DR CLSR LH 30 A Back door closer
4RSF RH 30 A Third seat adjustment (right)
5DOOR DL 15 A No circuit
6AHC-B 20 A 4-Wheel AHC
7TEL 5 A Multimedia
8 TOW BK/UP 7.5 A To w i n g
9AHC-B No.2 10 A 4-Wheel AHC
10 ECU-IG No.4 5 A
VGRS, power back door, rear ECU,
4-Wheel AHC, third seat adjustment,
tire pressure warning system ECU
623
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Fuse Ampere Circuit
11 SEAT-A/C FAN 10 A Ventilators
12 SEAT-HTR 20 A Seat heaters
13 AFS 5 A Adaptive front-lighting system
14 ECU-IG No.3 5 A Adaptive front-lighting system,
dynamic radar cruise control system
15 STRG HTR 10 A Heated steering wheel
16 TV 10 A Multi-display assembly
■After a fuse is replaced
●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 625)
●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
624
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
●Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.
625
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement
seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus
dealer.
■Prepare a replacement light bulb
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 703)
■Remove the engine compartment cover
P. 572
■Front bulb locations
Headlight low beam
Front fog light
Parking light
Headlight high beam
and daytime running lights
Front turn signal light
626
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Replacing light bulbs
■Headlight low beams
For the left side only: Remove the
securing bolt and move the washer
fluid filler opener.
■Rear bulb locations
Rear turn signal light Back-up lights
STEP 1
627
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Turn the cover counterclockwise
and remove it.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
628
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Headlight high beam and daytime running lights
Turn the cover counterclockwise
and remove it.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
629
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Front fog lights
Remove the fender liner bolts,
loose the fender liner nut and
remove the fender liner.
Fender liner nut
Fender liner bolts
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the connector while push-
ing the lock release.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
630
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Parking lights
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 1
STEP 2
631
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Front turn signal lights
Remove the fender liner bolts,
loose the fender liner nut and
remove the fender liner.
Fender liner nut
Fender liner bolts
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
632
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Back-up lights
Open the back door and remove
the bolts and the cover.
Turn the bulb bases counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
633
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Rear turn signal lights
Open the back door and remove
the bolts and lamp assembly.
Turn the bulb bases counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
634
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your
Lexus dealer.
●Front side marker lights
●High mounted stoplight
●Stop/tail lights
●Tail lights
●Rear side marker lights
●License plate lights
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer, for more information in the following situations. Tempo-
rary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
●Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.
■LED lights
The front side marker lights, stop/tail lights, tail lights, rear side marker lights, high
mounted stoplight and license plate lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the
LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
635
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Replacing light bulbs
●Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turn-
ing off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
●Do not attempt to repair or disassemble light bulbs, connectors, electric circuits
or component parts.
Doing so may result in death or serious injury due to electric shock.
■To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
636
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
When trouble arises 5
637
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers.............. 638
If your vehicle needs
to be towed............................ 639
If you think something is
wrong...................................... 645
Fuel pump shut off
system..................................... 646
Event data recorder .............. 647
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds..................................... 649
If a warning message is
displayed................................ 660
If you have a flat tire............... 663
If the engine will not start ..... 677
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P”..................... 679
If you lose your keys .............. 680
If you cannot operate back
door opener........................... 681
If the electronic key does
not operate properly.......... 682
If the battery is
discharged ............................ 685
If your vehicle overheats ..... 688
If the vehicle becomes
stuck.......................................... 691
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................. 692
638
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an
accident.
Press the switch to flash all the
turn signal lights. To turn them
off, press the switch once again.
5
When trouble arises
639
5-1. Essential information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer, before towing.
●The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat
bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
Use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
640
5-1. Essential information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the towing hook. This
should only be attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at
low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehi-
cle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condi-
tion.
Towing hook
■Emergency towing procedure
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch must be in ACCESSORY mode
(engine off) or IGNITION ON mode (engine running).
Put the four-wheel drive control switch in “H4”. (The center differential is
unlocked.)
Put the vehicle height in the “N” mode and press the height control switch
to turn off the AHC.
Put the shift lever in “N”.
Release the parking brake.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
5
When trouble arises
641
5-1. Essential information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■While towing
●Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing hook and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the
surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
●If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
●Never tow this vehicle with the wheels on the ground.
●Use only the front emergency towing hook or towing eyelets when towing your
vehicle.
642
5-1. Essential information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Towing with a sling-type truck
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
NOTICE
■To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
5
When trouble arises
643
5-1. Essential information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
From rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle wheels on the ground.
■To prevent damaging the vehicle
●Do not tow the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel
straight.
●When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the
opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle
could be damaged while being towed.
644
5-1. Essential information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a
flat bed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration. When attaching the
hooks to the rear of the vehicle,
make sure to attach them to the
inside of the vehicle.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not use the rear emergency towing hook.
5
When trouble arises
645
5-1. Essential information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■Visible symptoms
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
●Engine oil pressure gauge continually points lower than normal.
●Voltmeter continually points higher or lower than normal.
■Audible symptoms
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■Operational symptoms
●Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
646
5-1. Essential information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is acti-
vated.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode or
OFF.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged
and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag
inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to
the engine.
STEP 1
STEP 2
5
When trouble arises
647
5-1. Essential information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Event data recorder
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near
car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following infor-
mation:
●Engine speed
●Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
●Vehicle speed
●To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
●Position of the transmission shift lever
●Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
●Driver’s seat position
●Front passenger’s occupant classification
●SRS airbag deployment data
●SRS airbag system diagnostic data
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improv-
ing vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR
does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of
your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal
vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record
data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
648
5-1. Essential information
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Disclosure of the data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
●An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a
leased vehicle) is obtained
●Officially requested by the police or other authorities
●Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
●Ordered by a court
However, if necessary Lexus will:
●Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
●Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without dis-
closing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed neces-
sary
●Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information
to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes
5
When trouble arises
649
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be
dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with the
vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
•Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or
flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessar-
ily indicate a malfunction in the system.
650
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer, immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The emission control system;
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system;
• The electronic automatic transmission control system.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
•The ABS;
• The brake assist system
Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
5
When trouble arises
651
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Slip indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC;
• The TRAC;
• The hill-start assist control system
(Flashes)
Cruise control indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.
(Flashes)
“AFS OFF” indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in the AFS.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door is not
fully closed.
Check that all doors are
closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates that remaining fuel
is about 4.0 gal. (15.0 L, 3.3
Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Warning light Warning light/Details
652
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(on the center
panel)
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure.
Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pres-
sure warning system.
Have the system checked by
your Lexus dealer.
Unengaged “Park” warning
light
Indicates that the transmis-
sion “Park” mechanism is not
engaged.
Shift four-wheel drive control
to “H4” or “L4”. (P. 2 5 6 )
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
653
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is not
fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
*2: Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminders:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the driver
and front passenger that his/her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds for
10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h).
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone
for 20 more seconds.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on or
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
Take appropriate action in
accordance with the message
displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
654
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●Is the fuel empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
●Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock
indicator light blinks
Take the specified steps. (P. 2 59)
If the brake system warning light or the malfunction indicator light also comes on, or
the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock indica-
tor light continues to blink after taking the specified steps, there may be a malfunc-
tion in the engine, the brake system or the four-wheel drive system. In this case, you
may not be able to transfer between “H4” and “L4” modes, and the center differen-
tial lock may not be able to be locked or unlocked. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer, immediately.
■Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passenger is not sitting in
the seat.
●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
5
When trouble arises
655
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the following:
●The airbag sensor assembly
●Front airbag sensors
●The curtain shield airbag sensors
●The side and curtain shield airbag sensors
●The seat belt buckle switches
●The driver’s seat position sensor
●The belt tension sensor
●The inflators
●The interconnecting wiring and power sources
●The front passenger occupant classification ECU
●“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
●The seatbelt pretensioners
●The roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off indicator light
■Changing the engine oil
Make sure to reset oil change system
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural
air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case,
adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few min-
utes).
656
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare
tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.
■If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will become inoperative in the following condi-
tions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
●If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer.
●If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
●If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
●If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
●If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or
wheel housings.
●If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
●If tire chains are used.
●If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.
●If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the
luggage compartment.
5
When trouble arises
657
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking 1 minute frequently when
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it
checked by Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure immediately.
●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat,
change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus
dealer.
●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could
lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
658
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-
sure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
5
When trouble arises
659
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction tell-
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warn-
ing system may not operate properly.
660
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If a warning message is displayed
Messages and warnings
The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on
the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspec-
tion by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected immediately by your Lexus
dealer.
The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions,
incorrectly performed operations, or shows messages that indicate a need
for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction pro-
cedure appropriate to the message.
Master warning light
The master warning light comes
on or flashes when a message is
being shown on the multi-infor-
mation display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning messages is shown again after its correction pro-
cedure has been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
5
When trouble arises
661
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
*: A buzzer sounds first time a message is shown on the multi-information display.
System
warning
light
Wa r n in g
buzzer*Warning
Comes on Sounds
Indicates an important situation,
such as when a system related to
driving is malfunctioning or that dan-
ger may result if the correction pro-
cedure is not performed.
Comes on
or flashes Sounds
Indicates an important situation,
such as when the system shown on
the multi-information display may be
malfunctioning.
Comes on Does not
sound
Indicates a condition, such as mal-
function of electrical components,
their condition, or indicates the need
for maintenance.
Flashes Does not
sound
Indicates a situation, such as when an
operation has been performed
incorrectly, or indicates how to per-
form an operation correctly.
662
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■System warning lights
The master warning light does not come on or flash in the following cases. Instead, a
separate system warning light will come on or flash along with the message shown
on the multi-information display.
●Malfunction of the AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)
The “AFS OFF” indicator light flashes. (P. 1 94 )
●Malfunction of the brake system
The brake system warning light (red indicator) comes on. (P. 649 )
●Malfunction of the ABS
The ABS warning light comes on. (P. 650 )
●Malfunction of the charging system
The charging system warning light comes on. (P. 6 49)
■Resetting the tire pressure warning data
After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, be sure to initialize the data. (P. 59 0 )
If the message remains on, the system may have malfunctioned. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■Warning messages in the cruise control mode
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the approach warning will not
illuminate even when vehicle-to-vehicle distance is closing.
●When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehicle’s speed.
●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed.
●Immediately after the cruise control speed has been set.
●At the instant the accelerator is applied.
NOTICE
■Engine oil maintenance message
The warning message is based on the projected driving range after engine oil main-
tenance message is reset.
The system does not monitor the purity of the engine oil.
5
When trouble arises
663
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■Before jacking up the vehicle
●Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift lever to “P”.
●Turn off the 4-Wheel AHC. (P. 244)
●Stop the engine.
●Turn on the emergency flashers.
■Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack
Tool b o x
Spare tire
664
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Taking out the jack
Remove the cover.
Loosen
Tighten
Loosen and remove the jack.
STEP 1
STEP 2
5
When trouble arises
665
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Taking out the tool box
Remove the cover.
Take out the tool box.
STEP 1
STEP 2
666
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Taking out the spare tire
Assembling the jack handle.
Remove the jack handle and the jack extension bar from the tool box
and assemble by following these steps.
Loosen the screw using a
screwdriver.
Assemble the jack handle and
the jack handle extension bar
and tighten the screw.
Check that the screw is firmly
tightened.
Open the cover.
STEP 1
STEP 2
5
When trouble arises
667
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Insert the jack handle extension
into the lowering screw.
Lower
Raise
Place a rag under the jack handle
extension to protect the back door.
Lower the spare tire completely to
the ground.
Pull out the spare tire and remove
the holding bracket.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
668
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
Pry off the wheel ornament, using
the beveled end of the wheel orna-
ment remover as shown.
STEP 1STEP 1
Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire
STEP 2
5
When trouble arises
669
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
Assembling the jack handle.
Remove the jack handle, jack extension bar and jack handle bar from
the tool box and assemble by following these steps.
Loosen the bolts and the screw
using either the jack handle or a
screwdriver.
Assemble the jack handle
extension bar and the jack han-
dle bar and tighten the bolts.
Check that the bolts are firmly
tightened.
STEP 3
STEP 4
670
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Assemble the jack handle
extension bar and the jack han-
dle and tighten the screw.
Check that the screw is firmly
tightened.
Position the jack at the jack points
as shown.
Front - Under the chassis frame
side rail
Rear - Under the rear axle housing
STEP 5
5
When trouble arises
671
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
STEP 6
STEP 7
672
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each nut by hand to
approximately the same amount.
Turn the nut washers until they
come into contact with the disc
wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)
STEP 1
STEP 2
Disc wheel
Washe r
STEP 3
STEP 4
5
When trouble arises
673
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Reinstall the wheel ornament.
Stowing the flat/spare tire, jack and tools
Lay down the tire with the outer
side facing up, and install the hold-
ing bracket.
Raise the tire.
Stow the tools and jack securely, and replace all covers.
STEP 5
STEP 1
■After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 590 )
STEP 2
STEP 3
674
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle
suddenly falling off the jack.
●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
●Be sure to turn off the active height control suspension and stop the engine.
●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle will be injured.
■Using the jack handle
Tighten all the jack handle bolts securely using a Phillips-head screwdriver, to pre-
vent the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.
5
When trouble arises
675
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
●Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from under the
vehicle.
●Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the
ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to
bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts
to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
●Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4
kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheel
may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
●Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while
the vehicle is moving.
676
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■When stowing the flat tire
Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle underbody.
■When replacing the tires
●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
●Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as
well.
■To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
5
When trouble arises
677
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If the engine will not start
If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting proce-
dure (P. 172) or releasing the steering lock (P. 174), confirm the follow-
ing points.
■The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates
normally
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
●The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 172)
●There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 1 16)
■The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and head-
lights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low vol-
ume
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 685)
●The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■The starter motor does not turn over
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electri-
cal problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an
interim measure is available to start the engine. (P. 678)
678
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Emergency start function
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is functioning normally.
Set the parking brake.
Put the shift lever in “P”.
Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY
mode.
Push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch about 15 sec-
onds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
■The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and head-
lights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 685)
●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer, if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
5
When trouble arises
679
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be
a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental opera-
tion of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer,
immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
Set the parking brake.
Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY
mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screw driver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override but-
ton.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
680
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If you lose your keys
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer, using one of
the other keys and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
5
When trouble arises
681
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If you cannot operate back door opener
Remove the cover on the back
door trim.
Use a cloth to prevent scratches.
Push the lever for the back door
motor, open the back door.
If the back door opener does not operate, there may be a problem with the
back door opener system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the back door can be opened from the inside.
STEP 1
STEP 2
682
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If the electronic key does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions
Using the mechanical key (P. 29)
in order to perform the following
operations.
Locks all doors
Closes the windows/moon roof
(turn and hold)*
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward
unlocks the driver’s door. Turn-
ing the key once again unlocks
the other doors.
Opens the windows/moon roof
(turn and hold)*
*: This setting must be customized
at your Lexus dealer.
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(P. 37) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless
remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened or
the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
5
When trouble arises
683
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the
engine
Shift the shift lever to “P” and apply the brakes.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key (including the
card key) to the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
An alarm will sound to indicate that
the start function cannot detect the
electronic key that is touched to
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch if any of the doors is opened
and closed while the key is touched
to the switch.
To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 5 sec-
onds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be changed
each time the switch is pressed. (P. 173)
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
within 5 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake
pedal depressed.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be oper-
ated, contact your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
684
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to “P” and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you nor-
mally do when stopping the engine.
■Replacing the key battery
As this above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the elec-
tronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (P. 6 06)
■Alarm
Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system.
If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the
alarm may be triggered. (P. 118)
5
When trouble arises
685
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If the battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s
battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps
below.
Connect the jumper cables.
If required, remove all vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a
cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce
the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
STEP 1
686
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■Avoiding a discharged battery
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
then start the vehicle’s engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer,
as soon as possible.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
5
When trouble arises
687
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
CAUTION
■Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery.
●Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
●Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi-
nals.
●Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the
battery.
■Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when han-
dling the battery.
●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to
allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehi-
cle body.
●Do not lean over the battery.
●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-
ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
●Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any
of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
688
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning
system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam sub-
sides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 572 )
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the engine coolant temperature gauge begins to
fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your Lexus dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and inspect
the radiator core (radiator) for
any leaks.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
5
When trouble arises
689
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
●The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is
experienced.
●Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious
injury such as burns.
●Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is
running.
●Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.
Add engine coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is
unavailable. (P. 698)
Have the vehicle checked at the nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
STEP 6
690
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly
can cause damage to the engine.
5
When trouble arises
691
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If the vehicle becomes stuck
CAUTION
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surround-
ing area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme
caution.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
●Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
●If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require
towing to be freed.
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in
“P”.
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Turn off VSC. (P. 267)
Shift the shift lever to the “D” or “R” position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
692
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
CAUTION
■If the engine has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the engine.
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle
in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to “N”.
If the shift lever is shifted to “N”
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to “N”
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehi-
cle speed as much as possible.
Stop the engine by pressing and
holding the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch for 3 consecutive
seconds or more.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 3
STEP 4
Press and hold for 3 seconds or more
STEP 5
Vehicle specifications 6
693
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ............... 694
Fuel information..................... 704
Tire information....................... 707
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ......... 718
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize.................... 728
694
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
*1: Unladen vehicles
*2: Vehicles with roof luggage carrier
*3: Vehicles with an antenna and without roof luggage carrier
*4: Vehicles without an antenna and roof luggage carrier
Overall length 196.5 in. (4990 mm)
Overall width 77.6 in. (1970 mm)
Overall height*1
75.6 in. (1920 mm)*2
75.2 in. (1910 mm)*3
73.4 in. (1865 mm)*4
Wheelbase 112.2 in. (2850 mm)
Tr e a d Front 64.6 in. (1640 mm)
Rear 64.4 in. (1635 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage) 1230 lb. (560 kg)
TWR
(trailer weight +
cargo weight)
With brake 7000 lb. (3175 kg)
Without
brake 1000 lb. (454 kg)
695
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Vehicle identification
■Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top
left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certifi-
cation Label.
■Engine number
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown.
696
6-1. Specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Engine
Fuel
Model 3UR-FE
Typ e 8-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.70 4.02 in. (94.0 102.0 mm)
Displacement 345.6 cu.in. (5663 cm3)
Valve clearance
(engine cold) Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel type Premium unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 24.5 gal. (93 L, 20.4 lmp.gal.)
697
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Lubrication system
■Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the follow-
ing grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil
may be used. However, SAE 0W-
20 is the best choice for good fuel
economy and good starting in cold
weather.
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil
which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for
easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle
is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill — reference)
With filter
Without filter
7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp.qt.)
7.5 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.)
Outside temperature
698
6-1. Specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee)
Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you
should use.
Cooling system
Ignition system
Capacity 17.6 qt. (16.7 L, 14.6 Imp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-sili-
cate, non amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make DENSO SK20HR11
Gap 0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
699
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Electrical system
Differential
Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the fac-
tory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus
dealer for further details.
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.
Battery
Open voltage at 68F (20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after
the engine and all lights are turned off.)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Oil capacity
Front
Rear
2.01 qt. (1.90 L, 1.67 lmp.qt.)
4.44 qt. (4.20 L, 3.70 lmp.qt.)
Oil type and
viscosity
Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil
LT 75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
700
6-1. Specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Automatic transmission
The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact
your Lexus dealer.
Tr a ns f e r
*: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” at the fac-
tory. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” or an equiva-
lent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your
Lexus dealer for further details.
Fluid capacity
With air-cooled
type ATF
cooler
12.6 qt. (11.9 L, 10.5 lmp.qt.)
Without
air-cooled type
ATF cooler
12.3 qt. (11.6 L, 10.2 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■Automatic transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterio-
ration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and
ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Oil capacity 1.53 qt. (1.45 L, 1.28 lmp.qt.)
Oil type*Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF or
equivalent
Recommended oil viscosity SAE 75W
701
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Brakes
*1: Minimum pedal clearance from Tibia-pad when depressed with a force of 110
lbf (490 N, 50 kgf) while the engine is running
*2: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45.0 lbf (200 N,
20.4 kgf)
Chassis lubrication
Steering
Pedal clearance *12.6 in. (67 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1.0 6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lever travel *25 7 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
Propeller shafts
Spider
Slide yoke
Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Molybdenum-disulfide lithium base chassis
grease, NLGI No.2 or Lithium base chassis
grease, NLGI No.2
Free play Less than 1.18 in. (30 mm)
Power steering fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II
or III
702
6-1. Specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Suspension
Tires and wheels
Fluid type Suspension fluid AHC
Tire s ize P285/50R20 111V
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation
pressure)
Normal driving
Front:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Trailer towing
Add 2 psi (10 kPa, 0.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
rear tires.
Wheel size 20 8 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)
703
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Light bulbs
A: H11 halogen bulbs
B: HB3 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs
D: Single end bulbs
E: Double end bulbs
Light Bulbs Bulb No. WTy p e
Exterior
Headlights
Low beam
High beam
9005
55
60
A
B
Front turn signal lights 3457 28 C
Parking lights 5 C
Front fog lights 55 A
Rear turn signal lights 21 C
Back-up lights 921 18 C
Running board lights 3.8 C
Interior
Front interior light 8 C
Rear interior lights 8 C
Vanity lights 2 D
Door courtesy lights 5 C
Glove box light 1.2 C
Luggage compartment light 8 E
Deck light 5 E
704
6-1. Specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Fuel information
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Lexus dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating
or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If 91
octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gaso-
line with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking. Per-
sistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by
refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
705
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Gasoline quality standards
●Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is
expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
customer satisfaction through better performance.
■Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid build-up of engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep
clean intake systems.
■Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygen-
ates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle perfor-
mance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
●Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate con-
tent is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
●If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower
than 87.
●Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
706
6-1. Specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy clopen-
tadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-
taining MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this hap-
pens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic convert-
ers causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated
here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot start-
ing, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohole
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
707
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tire information
Typ i cal t ire sy m bo ls
Tire size (P. 70 9 )
Summer tire or all season tire (P. 592)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 708)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Location of treadwear indicators (P. 588)
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 712)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 712)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
708
6-1. Specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pres-
sure.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a
bias-ply tire.
709
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tire size
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
710
6-1. Specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S.A. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehi-
cles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
711
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) trac-
tion.
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
712
6-1. Specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more than
1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pres-
sure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manu-
facturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equip-
ment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and addi-
tional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded
vehicle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants speci-
fied in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
713
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tire related term Meaning
Production options weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg)
times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by dis-
tributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded
vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on the
tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by dis-
tributing to each axle its share of curb weight, acces-
sory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed
in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by
two
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated
tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped
to fit the rim
714
6-1. Specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tire related term Meaning
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the
bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less
than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on
the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the
rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
715
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tire related term Meaning
Intended outboard side-
wall
(a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white
lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model
name molding that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b)The outward facing sidewall of asymmetrical tire
that has a particular side that must always face out-
ward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-
walls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
716
6-1. Specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tire related term Meaning
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipur-
pose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fab-
ric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-
walls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
717
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
*: Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various
designated seating capacities
Tire related term Meaning
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and
which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at
least one sidewall
Tes t r im The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
Tr e a d That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tre a d r i b A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves designed
to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the
tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
Designated seating capac-
ity, Number of occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 22 in front
5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second seat,
1 in third seat,
1 in fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat,
1 in fourth seat
718
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Customizing vehicle features using the touch screen
Press .
Touch “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Touch “Vehicle Customization”.
Touch the setting to be changed.
Change each setting and touch
“Save”.
If “Save” is not touched before
switching to another screen, any
changes will be lost.
A message indicating that the settings are being saved will
appear.
Do not perform any other operations while this message is dis-
played.
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personal-
ized to your preferences.
Programming of these preferences can be performed by your Lexus
dealer.
It is also possible to customize certain vehicle features yourself using the
touch screen.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
719
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Customizable features
Vehicle customization settings can be changed at your Lexus dealer.
Some settings can be changed using the touch screen.
Settings that can be changed using the touch screen
Settings that can be changed using the vehicle switches
Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, —= Not available
Item Function Default
setting
Customized
setting
Smart access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 33 )
Smart access sys-
tem with push-but-
ton start
ON OFF O — O
Smart door unlock-
ing Driver’s door All the doors O O O
Operation signal
(Buzzer) ON OFF — — O
720
6-2. Customization
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Wireless
remote
control
(P. 46)
Wireless remote
control ON OFF — — O
Open door warn-
ing function (when
locking the vehicle)
ON OFF — — O
Unlocking opera-
tion
Driver’s door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in
one step
O — O
Power back door
operation Push and hold
One short
push — — O
Push twice — — O
OFF — — O
Smart access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 33 )
and wireless
remote
control
(P. 46)
Operation signal
(Emergency flash-
ers)
ON OFF O — O
Time elapse d
before automatic
door lock function
is activated if door
is not opened after
being unlocked
60 seconds
OFF
O — O30 seconds
120 seconds
Item Function Default
setting
Customized
setting
721
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Door lock
(P. 49)
Unlocking using a
mechanical key
Driver’s door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in
one step
O — O
Speed-detecting
automatic door
lock function
OFF ON O O O
Shifting the shift
lever to position
other than “P” locks
all doors
ON OFF O O O
Shifting the shift
lever to “P” unlocks
all doors
ON OFF O O O
Opening the
driver’s door
unlocks all doors
OFF ON O O O
Power back
door
(P. 54)
Switch operation Push and hold One short
push — — O
Operation signal OFF ON — — O
Wireless remote
control linked oper-
ation (one motion)
ON*1OFF*2— — O
Item Function Default
setting
Customized
setting
722
6-2. Customization
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Power
windows
(P. 107)
Mechanical key
linked operation OFF ON — — O
Wireless remote
control linked oper-
ation (open)
OFF ON — — O
Linked entry func-
tion (close) OFF ON — — O
Moon roof
(P. 110)
Mechanical key
linked operation*3OFF ON — — O
Linked operation of
components when
mechanical key is
use
Slide only Tilt only — — O
Wireless remote
control linked oper-
ation (open)*4
OFF ON — — O
Linked operation of
components when
wireless remote
control used
Slide only Tilt only — — O
Linked entry func-
tion*5OFF ON — — O
Item Function Default
setting
Customized
setting
723
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 193 )
Light sensor sensi-
tivity Standard -2 to 2 O — O
Daytime running
light system ON OFF*6O — O
Time elapse d
before headlights
automatically turn
off after doors are
closed
30 seconds
OFF
O — O
60 seconds
90 seconds
Rear window
wiper and
washer
(P. 201)
Switching opera-
tion when the vehi-
cle is stationary
ON OFF — — O
Drip prevention
function ON OFF — — O
Rear window wiper
operation linked
with washer
ON OFF — — O
Linked operation
when the shift lever
in “R” position
ON OFF — — O
Times of the linked
operation when the
shift lever in “R”
position
Once Continuously — — O
Item Function Default
setting
Customized
setting
724
6-2. Customization
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Illumination
(P. 51 0 )
Time period before
the interior lights
turn off
15 seconds
OFF
O — O7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Time period before
the exterior lights
turn off
15 seconds
OFF
O — O7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation after the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch is
turned off
ON OFF — — O
Operation when
the doors are
unlocked
ON OFF — — O
Operation when
you approach the
vehicle with the
electronic key on
your person (When
the interior light
switch is door posi-
tion)
ON OFF — — O
Foot lights ON OFF — — O
Item Function Default
setting
Customized
setting
725
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Illumination
(P. 51 0 )
Outer foot lights OFF ON — — O
Sensitivity of the
ambient light sen-
sor used for dim-
ming the meter
lights etc.
Standard -2 to 2 O — O
Sensitivity of the
ambient light sen-
sor used for bright-
ening the meter
lights etc.
Standard -2 to 2 O — O
Automatic air
conditioning
system
(P. 33 4)
Exhaust gas sensor
sensitivity Standard -3 to 3 O — O
Switching between
outside air and
recirculated air
mode linked to
“AUTO” switch
operation
Auto Manual O — O
A/C Auto switch
operation Auto Manual O — O
Item Function Default
setting
Customized
setting
726
6-2. Customization
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
*1: In this case, the power back door operation will be made only by push and hold.
*2: The back door can be opened using the wireless remote control after unlock-
ing the back door.
*3: The settings can be changed when the mechanical key linked operation of the
power window is set to ON.
*4: The settings can be changed when the wireless remote control linked operation
of the power window is set to ON.
*5: The settings can be changed when the entry function linked operation of the
power window is set to ON.
*6: Vehicles sold outside Canada
■Vehicle customization
●If the smart access system with push-button start is turned “OFF”, unlock door
cannot be selected.
●If the doors are not opened after locking and are then automatically re-locked, a
signal will be given if “Operation signal (Emergency flashers)” or “Operation
signal (Buzzer)” are set to ON.
■When setting using the vehicle switches
When using the vehicle switches to set an item that can also be set using the touch
screen, the item displayed on the touch screen will not change immediately.
If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is first turned to OFF, the screen display will
change once the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode again.
■When customizing using the touch screen
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to
“P”. Also, to prevent battery discharge, leave the engine running while customizing
the features.
727
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Multi-information display (P. 190)
CAUTION
■During customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is
parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the
vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■During customization
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing
features.
Available languages
English (U.S.A.), English (UK), French, Ger-
man, Spanish, Italian, Japanese, Simplified
Chinese and Traditional Chinese
728
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Power back door
• After reconnecting or changing the
battery with power back door
opened
• After changing a fuse with power
back door opened
P. 57
Engine oil maintenance
data • After changing engine oil P. 576
Tire pressure warning
system
• When the set tire pressure has been
changed before towing with the
P285/50R20 tires.
• When rotating the tires in above situ-
ation.
• When changing the tire inflation
pressure by changing traveling speed
or load weight, etc.
P. 589
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases
such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on
the vehicle.
730
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-
free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-
free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://
www.safercar.gov
.
731
7
For owners
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
732
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
733
7
For owners
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
734
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
735
7
For owners
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
736
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
737
7
For owners
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
738
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
739
7
For owners
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
740
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
741
7
For owners
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
742
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
744
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
A/C Air Conditioning
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
AFS Adaptive Front-lighting System
AHC Active Height Control Suspension
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
AVS Adaptive Variable Suspension
CRS Child Restraint System
DISP Display
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event Data Recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating
GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GPS Global Positioning System
HI High
I/M Emission inspection and maintenance
INT Intermittent
LLeft
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED Light Emitting Diode
LO Low
M + S Mud and Snow
MMT Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
745
Abbreviation list
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
NNormal
OBD On Board Diagnostics
PCS Pre-Collision System
PWR Power
RRight
RSCA Roll Sensing of Curtain Shield Airbag
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring (Warning) System
TRAC Traction Control
TWR Trailer Weight Rating
VGRS Variable Gear Ratio Steering
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
746
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C
Air conditioning filter .......................603
Automatic air conditioning
system..................................................334
ABS.............................................................265
Active head restraint..............................64
Active height control
suspension............................................244
Active traction control........................265
Adaptive front lighting system ......... 194
Adaptive Variable
Suspension...........................................255
AFS .............................................................. 194
AHC...........................................................244
Air conditioning filter ..........................603
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter .......................603
Automatic air conditioning
system..................................................334
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions..........127
Airbag precautions for your
child...........................................................131
Airbag warning light ....................... 650
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions ...................... 127
Curtain shield airbag
precautions ...........................................131
Front passenger occupant
classification system........................137
General airbag precautions ............131
Locations of airbags...........................123
Modification and disposal of
airbags...................................................135
Proper driving posture ..............121, 131
Roll sensing of curtain shield
airbags off switch.............................136
Side airbag operating
conditions.............................................127
Side airbag precautions.....................131
SRS airbags............................................ 123
SRS airbags instructions
for Canadian owners....................733
Alarm............................................................118
Antenna.................................................... 363
Anti-lock brake system .....................265
Armrest ....................................................535
Ashtrays.................................................... 526
Audio system
Antenna.................................................. 363
AUX port...............................................424
CD player/changer.........................366
DVD player/changer ..................... 366
iPod............................................................ 412
MP3/WMA disc................................373
Optimal use ..........................................422
Radio .......................................................356
Steering wheel audio switch........ 425
USB memory........................................ 412
Video CD..............................................377
Automatic air conditioning
system ....................................................334
Automatic headlight leveling
system ......................................................196
Automatic light control
system ......................................................193
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission ................... 176
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P” ............................... 679
S mode .....................................................178
A
747
Alphabetical index
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
AUX port .................................................424
Auxiliary box .......................................... 520
AVS ........................................................... 255
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 632
Wattage ................................................. 703
Back door
Back door ................................................ 54
Wireless remote control key...........46
Battery
Checking...............................................584
If the vehicle has discharged
battery..................................................685
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................289
Bluetooth® audio................................. 404
Bluetooth® phone.................................461
Bottle holder ............................................519
Brake
Fluid............................................................701
Parking brake........................................182
Brake assist............................................. 265
Break-in tips .............................................163
Brightness control
Instrument light control ................... 185
Care
Exterior...................................................554
Interior..................................................... 557
Seat belts ...............................................558
Cargo capacity .......................................281
Cargo hooks.......................................... 538
CD changer ........................................... 366
CD player................................................ 366
Center differential
lock/unlock switch............................256
Chains .......................................................289
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition .................. 143
Booster seats, installation ...............148
Convertible seats, definition.......... 143
Convertible seats, installation....... 148
Infant seats, definition........................ 143
Infant seats, installation.....................148
Installing CRS with
LATCH anchor................................ 149
Installing CRS with seat
belts ..........................................................151
Installing CRS with
top tether strap................................. 156
Child safety
Airbag precautions.............................. 131
Battery precautions .............585, 687
Child-protectors .................................. 50
Child restraint system....................... 143
Heated steering wheel
precautions....................................... 530
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................................96
Installing child restraints...................148
Moon roof precautions...................... 112
Power window lock switch............ 107
Power window precautions ..........109
Removed key battery
precautions....................................... 607
Seat belt precautions .......................... 97
Seat heater
precautions........................................534
Child-protectors......................................50
Cigarette lighter....................................527
B
C
748
Alphabetical index
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Cleaning
Exterior ...................................................554
Interior.....................................................557
Seat belts............................................... 558
Clock*
Condenser ..............................................579
Console box ............................................ 516
Cool box...................................................522
Cooling system
Engine overheating ......................... 688
Crawl Control......................................... 261
Cruise control............................204, 208
Cup holder ...............................................518
Curtain shield airbags.......................... 123
Customizable features ........................ 718
Daytime running light system ........... 195
Defogger
Rear window........................................349
Dimension................................................694
Dinghy towing......................................... 313
Display
Crawl Control display ......................261
Intuitive parking assist system
display.................................................. 223
Shift position and shift
range ......................................................178
Trip information..................................... 191
Warning message............................ 660
Do-it-yourself maintenance .............566
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights.......................... 510
Wattage..................................................703
Door lock
Back door.................................................54
Side door...................................................49
Wireless remote control key...........46
Doors
Door glasses..........................................107
Door lock ................................33, 46, 49
Side mirrors............................................104
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light............................................................651
Driving
Break-in tips...........................................163
Correct posture.....................................121
Off-road precautions.......................276
Procedures............................................. 162
Winter driving tips............................ 289
Driving position memory......................83
DVD player/changer .........................366
Dynamic radar cruise control .........208
Electronic key
If your electronic key battery is
discharged........................................606
Emergency flashers.............................638
Emergency, in case of
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................682
If the engine will not start................677
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P” ............................... 679
If the vehicle has discharged
battery .................................................685
If the warning buzzer
sounds................................................. 649
If the warning light turns on.......... 649
D
E
749
Alphabetical index
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
If the warning message is
displayed............................................660
If you cannot operate back
door opener.......................................681
If you have a flat tire ........................663
If you lose your keys ....................... 680
If you think something is
wrong...................................................645
If your vehicle becomes
stuck .......................................................691
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency ......... 692
If your vehicle needs to be
towed...................................................639
If your vehicle overheats............... 688
Engine
Compartment.......................................571
Engine switch ........................................ 173
Hood .......................................................570
How to start the
engine.................................................... 172
Identification number.......................695
If the engine will not start................677
Ignition switch........................................ 173
Overheating........................................ 688
Engine coolant
Capacity.................................................698
Checking...............................................578
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................289
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.......................................................184
Engine immobilizer system................. 116
Engine oil
Capacity .................................................697
Checking ...............................................573
Preparing and checking
before winter ................................... 289
Engine oil maintenance data............576
Engine switch ...........................................172
Event data recorder ............................ 647
First-aid kit holder.................................539
Floor mats ................................................536
Fluid
Brake......................................................... 701
Power steering..................................... 701
Washer .................................................. 587
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs........................629
Switch.........................................................197
Wattage..................................................703
Four-wheel drive system ...................256
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs........................629
Switch.........................................................197
Wattage..................................................703
Front passenger occupant
classification system...........................137
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light....................................... 651
Front seats
Adjustment...............................................64
Driving position memory..................83
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 631
Wattage..................................................703
F
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
750
Alphabetical index
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Fuel
Capacity.................................................696
Fuel gauge ............................................. 184
Fuel pump shut off system ............646
Information............................................704
Refueling ....................................................113
Type..........................................................696
Fuel door .....................................................113
Fuel filler door ...........................................113
Fuel pump shut off system.................646
Fuses ......................................................... 608
Garage door opener ......................... 540
Gauges ......................................................184
Glove box .................................................515
Glove box light ....................................... 515
Hands-free system................................ 461
Hazard light
Switch ......................................................638
Head restraints
Adjusting................................................... 87
Headlight cleaner.................................203
Headlights
Replacing light bulbs........................625
Switch ........................................................193
Wattage..................................................703
Heaters
Sear heaters ........................................532
Side mirror............................................349
Steering wheel ....................................530
Hill-start assist control ........................265
Hood..........................................................570
Hooks
Cargo hook .........................................538
Tie-down hooks.................................538
Horn............................................................ 183
I/M test .....................................................565
Identification
Engine.....................................................695
Vehicle....................................................695
Ignition
Engine switch.........................................172
Keys..............................................................28
Ignition switch ........................................172
Ignition switch ..........................................172
Illuminated entry system..................... 510
Indicator lights .........................................187
Inside rear view mirror........................ 102
Instrument panel light
control..................................................... 185
Interior lights
Interior lights list ...................................510
Switch..........................................................511
Wattage................................................. 703
Intuitive parking assist......................... 222
Jack
Vehicle-equipped jack................... 663
Jack handle ............................................. 666
G
H
I
J
751
Alphabetical index
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Keyless entry..............................................46
Keys
Electronic key......................................... 28
If you lose your keys ....................... 680
If your electronic key battery
is discharged....................... 606, 682
Ignition switch........................................ 172
Keyless entry............................................46
Key number............................................. 30
Keys............................................................. 28
Mechanical key ..................................... 28
Wireless remote control key...........46
Knee airbags............................................123
Language
Multi-information
display...................................................727
License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 625
Light bulbs
Replacing............................................... 625
Wattage ................................................. 703
Lights
Door courtesy lights ......................... 510
Emergency flasher switch.............638
Fog light switch..................................... 197
Hazard light switch...........................638
Headlights switch................................193
Interior light switch................................511
Personal light switch..........................512
Replacing light bulbs ....................... 625
Turn signal lever.................................... 181
Vanity lights..........................................525
Wattage ................................................. 703
Load capacity........................................ 288
Lock steering column ...........................174
Luggage compartment lights
Switch........................................................ 513
Wattage..................................................703
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 566
General maintenance .....................562
Maintenance data............................. 694
Maintenance requirements .........560
Meter
Instrument panel light
control...................................................185
Meters.......................................................184
Micro dust and pollen filter...............340
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror..................... 102
Mirror position memory....................83
Side mirrors ...........................................104
Vanity mirrors......................................525
Moon roof...................................................110
MP3 disc..................................................373
Multi-information display ...................190
Noise from under vehicle..................... 22
Odometer................................................. 184
Off road precautions........................... 276
Oil
Engine oil................................................573
Opener
Back door.................................................54
Fuel filler door.........................................113
Hood....................................................... 570
K
L
M
N
O
752
Alphabetical index
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding ....................... 104
Outside temperature
display ....................................................344
Overhead console ................................ 517
Overheating, Engine.......................... 688
Parking brake.......................................... 182
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs........................630
Switch ........................................................193
Wattage..................................................703
PCS ..............................................................271
Personal lights
Switch ........................................................512
Power back door .....................................55
Power outlet............................................528
Power steering
Fluid............................................................701
Power windows ...................................... 107
Pre-collision system...............................271
Radar cruise control........................... 208
Radiator ....................................................579
Radio..........................................................356
Rear air conditioning
system.....................................................345
Rear seat
Adjustment............................................... 66
Tumbling second seats...................... 67
Tumbling third seats............................ 70
Rear seat entertainment system.....429
Rear step bumper....................................56
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs........................633
Wattage..................................................703
Rear view monitor system ................230
Rear window defogger ...................... 349
Rear window wiper............................... 201
Replacing
Key battery ...........................................606
Fuses........................................................608
Light bulbs ............................................ 625
Tires.......................................................... 663
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners.......................................... 730
Roll sensing of curtain shield
airbags off switch.................................136
Roof luggage carrier............................ 281
Safety Connect ..................................... 546
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt ......................... 91
Automatic Locking Retractor........ 95
Child restraint system
installation............................................148
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts ....................................558
Emergency Locking
Retractor................................................94
How to wear your seat belt .............. 91
How your child should wear
the seat belt...........................................96
Pre-collision seat belts........................94
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use................................................... 95
Reminder light.......................................651
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners............................ 731
Seat belt pretensioners ......................94
Seat heaters............................................ 532
Seat ventilators......................................532
P
R
S
753
Alphabetical index
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Seats
Adjustment
precautions .......................................... 65
Child seats/child restraint
system installation............................148
Cleaning ................................................ 557
Driver’s seat position
memory ................................................. 83
Front seat adjustment..........................64
Head restraint ........................................ 87
Properly sitting in the seat.................121
Rear seat adjustment.......................... 66
Seat heaters.......................................... 532
Service reminder
indicators ...............................................187
Shift lever
Automatic transmission.................... 176
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from “P”......................... 679
Side airbags..............................................123
Side marker light ....................................193
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding........................104
Mirror position memory................... 83
Smart access system with
push-button start
Entry function ..........................................33
Starting the engine.............................. 172
Spare tire
Inflation pressure ............................... 702
Storage location.................................663
“SOS” button ......................................... 546
Spark plug............................................... 698
Specifications..........................................694
Speedometer ..........................................184
Steering
Adjustment.............................................100
Column lock release..........................174
Heated steering wheel................... 530
Steering wheel
Audio switches ................................425
Steering wheel position
memory..................................................83
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs........................625
Storage compartment ....................... 538
Storage feature....................................... 514
Storage precautions............................. 281
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck....................................................... 691
Sun visors .................................................524
Sunshade
Roof................................................................111
Switch
ECT switch..............................................177
Emergency flasher switch ............638
Engine switch.........................................172
Fog light switch.....................................197
Hazard light switch .......................... 638
Ignition switch........................................172
Light switches ....................................... 193
Power back door..................................55
Power door lock switch ....................49
Power window switch...................... 107
Rear window wiper and
washer switch.................................... 201
Window lock switch.......................... 107
Wipers and washer
switch.......................................... 198, 201
754
Alphabetical index
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Tachometer..............................................184
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs........................625
Switch ........................................................193
Talk switch ........................335, 354, 474
Telephone switch................................... 461
Theft deterrent system
Alarm .......................................................... 118
Engine immobilizer system ............. 116
Tie-down hooks.................................... 538
Tire inflation pressure .........................597
Tire pressure warning system......... 588
Tire information
Glossary................................................... 712
Size ........................................................... 702
Tire identification number .............708
Uniform tire quality grading...........710
Tires
Chains.....................................................289
Checking.............................................. 588
If you have a flat tire..........................663
Inflation pressure................................597
Replacing.............................................. 668
Rotating tires....................................... 588
Size ........................................................... 702
Snow tires..............................................289
Spare tire................................................663
Tools...........................................................663
Total load capacity ...............................694
Touch screen........................................... 316
Towing
Dinghy towing ...................................... 313
Emergency towing...........................640
Trailer towing .......................................294
Traction control.....................................265
TRAC ........................................................ 265
Trailer towing ......................................... 294
Trip information display ...................... 190
Trip meter ................................................. 184
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............631, 633
Switch..........................................................181
Wattage................................................. 703
Vanity lights
Vanity lights.......................................... 525
Wattage................................................. 703
Vanity mirrors........................................525
Variable gear ratio steering............. 265
Vehicle identification
number .................................................. 695
Vehicle stability control .....................265
Ventilators...............................................532
VGRS........................................................ 265
Voice command
switch*........................... 335, 354, 474
VSC ...........................................................265
T
V
755
Alphabetical index
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
Warning buzzers
Brake system.......................................649
Open door .............................................651
Seat belt reminder ..............................651
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system ..................650
Brake system.......................................649
Charging system...............................649
Fuel level..................................................651
Malfunction indicator lamp ..........650
Master warning light........................653
Open door .............................................651
Pre-collision system.........................650
Seat belt reminder light....................651
SRS airbags..........................................650
Tire pressure........................................ 652
Unengaged “Park” ........................... 652
Warning messages.............................. 660
Warning reflector holder..................538
Washer
Checking...............................................587
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................289
Switch.............................................198, 201
Washing and waxing .......................... 554
Weight.......................................................694
Wheels .......................................................601
Wide view front & side monitor......234
Window glasses .....................................107
Window lock switch..............................107
Windows
Power windows ...................................107
Rear window defogger.................. 349
Washer..........................................198, 201
Windshield wipers.................................198
Windshield wiper de-icer................. 350
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery......................606
Wireless remote control key ..........46
WMA disc ...............................................373
W
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
756
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 66 3 If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 67 7 If the engine will not start
P. 11 6 Engine immobilizer system
P. 6 8 5 If the battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 679 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from
“P”
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 6 8 8 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 6 8 0 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 6 8 5 If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 49 Side doors
P. 54 Back door
The horn begins to sound
P. 118 Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand
P. 69 1 If the vehicle becomes stuck
758
What to do if...
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
■Warning lights
P. 650
or
P. 649 P. 650
P. 649 P. 651
P. 651
or
P. 65 0 P. 651
P. 65 0 P. 651
P. 651
or
P. 65 0 P. 6 52
P. 65 0 P. 65 3
P. 65 0
Brake system warning light
Cruise control indicator
light
“AFS OFF” indicator light
Charging system warning
light
Tire pressure warning light
Malfunction indicator lamp
Open door warning light
Low fuel level warning light
SRS warning light
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light
ABS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Unengaged “Park” warning
light
Pre-collision system
warning light
Master warning light
Slip indicator light
759
What to do if...
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
760
LX570_U (OM60F86U)
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel filler door
P. 1 1 3
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 570
Tire inflation pressure
P. 702
Fuel filler door opener
P. 11 3
Hood lock release lever
P. 570
Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 24.5 gal. (93 L, 20.4 lmp.gal.)
Fuel type Premium unleaded gasoline only P. 696
Cold tire inflation pressure P. 702
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill — reference)
qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
With filter 7.9 (7.5, 6.6)
Without filter 7.5 (7.1, 6.2)
Engine oil type
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil P. 697
